Catalogues and Specifications Reference Manual

Catalogues and Specifications
Reference Manual
Disclaimer
Information of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVA
Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries disclaim
any and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law.
Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd, or any of its subsidiaries, shall be liable to any person or
entity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information,
particulars, or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every
part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other
documentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries.
All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained in
this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. Where such
permission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently
displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material
or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also not
reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the
product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product,
machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd, save as permitted by
law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal
prosecution.
The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with
the terms and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant
User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.
First published September 2007
AVEVA Solutions Ltd, and its subsidiaries 2007
AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom
Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised
use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trade mark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Catalogues and Specifications Reference
Manual
Contents Page
12.0 i
Catalogues and Specifications Reference Manual
2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Who is this Manual Meant For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Communicating within PDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Command Description Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Standard Command Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
General PDMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Entering PARAGON or SPECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Leaving PARAGON or SPECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Saving Work and Updating Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Exit from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON without Saving Changes. . . . . . 3:3
Saving the Alpha Readout to File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Audible Error Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Switching Text Output Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Defining Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Catalogues and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
12.0 ii
Catalogue DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Content and Format of a Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
How Component Selection Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Catalogue Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
What is the Catalogue For?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Principal Features of the Catalogue Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Structure of the Catalogue Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Catalogue (CATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Catalogue Sections (SECT and STSEC) and Categories (CATE and STCA) . . 2:4
Elements Used in Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Elements Used in Piping Sections/Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Elements Used in Structural Sections/Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Text (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Component Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Insulation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Structural Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Design DB Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Catalogue Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Piping Component (COMP; SCOM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Profile (PROF; SPRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
J oint (J OIN; SJ OI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Fitting (FITT; SFIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
Navigating in the Catalogue Database Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Accessing a Catalogue Element on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Accessing a Catalogue Element by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Accessing an Element by Reference Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Going to the Previously Accessed Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Ascending the Catalogue Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
12.0
iii 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Accessing an Element via a Reference Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Other Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Component Design and Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Component Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
P-point and P-line Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
P-points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
P-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Geomset Primitive Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11
Model Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11
Setting Representation for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:13
Setting Profile Representation for Steelwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14
Setting Level Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
Setting Obstruction and Insulation Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16
Setting P-Point Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:17
Setting P-Line Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18
Full REPRESENTATION Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18
Pointsets and Geomsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
D Pointsets (PTSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Axial P-point (PTAXI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Cartesian P-point (PTCAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Mixed Type P-point (PTMIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Position Type P-point (PTPOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Structural Pointsets (PTSSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
D Geomsets (GMSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5
D Geomset Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Box (SBOX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Boxing (BOXI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7
Cone (SCON). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7
Cylinder (LCYL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Cylinder (SCYL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Slope-Bottomed Cylinder (SSLC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Disc (SDIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10
Dish (SDSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10
Line (LINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Line (SLINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Pyramid (LPYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
12.0 iv
Circular Torus (SCTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12
Rectangular Torus (SRTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Snout (LSNO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Sphere (SSPH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
Tube (TUBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
User-defined Extrusion (SEXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
Solid of Revolution (SREV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
Negative 3D Geomsets (NGMSET) and Negative Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:16
Structural Geomsets (GMSSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
Structural Geomset Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
Structural Rectangle (SREC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
Structural Annulus (SANN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:19
Structural Profile (SPRO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:20
Manipulating the Catalogue Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Basic Element Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Querying: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Creation, deletion etc: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Implicit element referencing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
List position changing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Standard attribute setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Creating Catalogues, Sections and Catalogue Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Using Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Expressions Using Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Examples of Parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Constructing 3D Pointsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
PTAXI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
PTCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
PTMIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Example of Defining a 3D Pointset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Defining an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Defining a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Defining an Explicit Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Defining a Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Defining Connection, Bore and Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Controlling the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Specifying Pipe End Conditions for use by ISODRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
12.0
v 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Constructing Structural Pointsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Example of Defining a Structural Pointset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
The Neutral Axis Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Defining an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Defining a Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Defining a Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Controlling the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Constructing 3D Geomsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Constructing Structural Geomsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Parameter-Controlled Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Axial Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Other Uses of PARAGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Detailing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Material Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Connection Compatibility Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Bolting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Use of Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
General Text Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
User-defined Nominal Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Attributes of DATA Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Querying Properties in DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Real Properties of P-points, P-Lines and Geomsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Checking Catalogue Database Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Initiating a Standard Data Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
What the Checking Facility Does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Controlling the Detailed Checking Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
P-point Conventions for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
12.0 vi
Special Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Implied Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Mitred Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
How End Cuts Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Dynamic PPOINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Pseudo Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Implied Geometry sets in PARAGON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Setting Up a Catalogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1
Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:1
Example Connection Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:1
The Connection Compatibility Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:2
Construction of Typical Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1
Summary of Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1
Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:4
Who This Manual is Meant For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
How This Manual is Set Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Catalogues and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Catalogue DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Content and Format of a Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
How Component Selection Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
How To Use SPECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Creating a Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Accessing an Existing Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Entering Tabular Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Special Characters in SPEC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Selector Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Subtype Selectors: A Special Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Including User-defined Attributes in Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
12.0
vii 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Including Comments in Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Editing an Existing Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Adding a New SPCOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Copying a Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Outputting a Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Defining the Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Outputting Complete Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Controlling the Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Outputting Parts of Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
How Bores Are Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Using Macros For SPECON Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Details of Typical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Selectors and Pointers for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
P-Point Zero: A Special Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Reference Pointers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Examples From Piping Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Selectors and Pointers for Structural Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Reference Pointers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Examples From Structural Component Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Selectors and Pointers for Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Pipework Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Structural Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11
Command Syntax Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
<speca> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
<table> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
<heading>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
<default> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
12.0 viii
<linesp> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
<id> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
<copy> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
Other PDMS Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:6
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1
Nominal Pipe Size Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1
Properties Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Setting Up a Properties Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Design Layout Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Material Property Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Case Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Component Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Constraint Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Run Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Material Property Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Hierarchy Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Material Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Pointers from the Design DB and Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Case Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Pointer from the Design DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Component Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Querying Calculated Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Pointer from the Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Constraints Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Pointer from the Design DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Run Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Some General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
12.0
ix 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
CLOCK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
COPY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
DELETE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
END Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
GOTO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
INCLUDE Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
LOCK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
NAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
NEW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
OLD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
QUERY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
RENAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
REORDER Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
SAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
UNLOCK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
UNNAME Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Reference Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Exit from PROPCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Use of Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Exponential Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
PROPCON Syntax Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
The PROPCON Syntax Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Properties Database Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1
Properties Database Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:1
Database Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:1
Attributes of Material Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Material World (MATW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Solid (SOLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
12.0 x
Fluid (FLUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Table of Density (TDEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Table of Stress (TSTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Table of Poissons Ratio (TPOI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4
Table of Coefficient of Expansion (TEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4
Table of Youngs Modulus (TYOU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4
Table of A Property (TAPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4
Table of B Property (TBPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4
Table of C Property (TCPR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:5
Text (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:5
Spot Density (SDEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:5
Spot Stress (SSTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:5
Spot Poissons Ratio (SPOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:5
Spot Coefficient of Expansion (SEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:6
Spot Youngs Modulus (SYOU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:6
Spot A Property (SAPR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:6
Spot B Property (SBPR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:6
Spot C Property (SCPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:6
Attributes of Case Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Case World (CASW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Case Type (CAST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Case (CASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Attributes of Component Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Component World (CMPW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:7
Component Type (CMPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:8
Component Data (CMPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:8
Tube Data (TUBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:8
Attributes of Constraint Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:9
Constraint World (CONW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:9
Constraint Type (CONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:9
Constraint (CONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:9
Case Table Element (TCAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Attributes of Run Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Run World (RUNW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Run (RUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Card (CARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Attributes of Group Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Group World (GPWL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:10
Group (GROU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:11
12.0
xi 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Index of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
12.0 xii
12.0 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd i
General
12.0 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd ii
Introduction
12.0 1 1:1 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
1 Introduction
1.1 About this Manual
This document is a Reference Manual for the Catalogues and Specifications. It describes
all of the PARAGON, SPECON and PROPCON keyboard-entered commands in detail. If
you need information on how to use the Graphical User Interfaces refer to the Catalogue
and Specifications User Guide.
It is assumed that you have attended a PDMS training course and are familiar with the basic
concepts underlying the use of PDMS.
1.2 Manual Structure
This manual is broken down in to four parts:
Part 1 gives generic command details
Part 2 gives details of the PARAGON commands
Part 3 gives details of the SPECON commands
Part 4 gives details of the PROPCON commands
1.3 Who is this Manual Meant For
In most companies the responsibility for creating Catalogues and Specifications is restricted
to a team of Standards Engineers within the Production Engineering Department or its
equivalent. You might, therefore, be a member of such a team setting up or updating a
Specification. Alternatively, you might be a pipework or structural designer who needs to use
a Specification to select a suitable component and who wishes to understand the principles
underlying the selection process.
You are assumed to be familiar with the general principles of using PDMS, although some of
the most relevant points are repeated in this manual as a reminder.
This manual does not assume that you are familiar with the details of that module.
12.0 1 1:2
Introduction
Communicating within PDMS
2 Communicating within PDMS
2.1 Commands
This section describes the conventions used in this manual to describe commands to be
typed in from the keyboard. The description of each command follows a standard format
which is designed to allow the basic attributes of a command to be interpreted easily. To get
the best out of this manual, you are strongly urged to read this section thoroughly.
2.1.1 Command Description Format
Once you have located the required command in this manual, you will find that it is
described in a standard format. This format is described below.
Title (e.g. Setting Level Representation)
Keywords This is a list of those PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON command words
which are the prime constituents of the command syntax which carries out the given
function.
Description This is a brief description of the use of the command.
Example(s) These are examples of typical command lines that show the effect of the
principal options. Special notes on the behaviour of the command in specific conditions
are given here.
Command Syntax This shows the actual command with its possible options. The
notation used for commands is described below (Syntax Diagrams).
Querying The relevant querying options are listed.
2.1.2 Syntax Diagrams
The commands described in this manual have their legal command and interrogation
options presented in the form of syntax diagrams. These diagrams formalise the precise
command sequences which may be used and are intended to supplement the explanations
given in the appropriate sections of the manual.
The following conventions apply to syntax diagrams:
All diagrams have abbreviated names. Such names are composed of lowercase letters
enclosed in angled brackets, e.g. <expres>. These short names, which are used for
cross-referencing purposes in the text and within other syntax diagrams, are
supplemented by fuller descriptions where they are not self-explanatory.
Commands to be input from the terminal are shown in a combination of uppercase and
lowercase letters. In general, these commands can be abbreviated; the capital letters
indicate the minimum permissible abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed
in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase
and lowercase letters.
12.0 1 2:2
For example, the command
DEFaul t
may be input in any of the following forms:
DEF
DEFA
DEFAU
DEFAUL
DEFAULT
Commands shown wholly in uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
Syntax diagrams are generally read from top left to bottom right.
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. Thus
means you may type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia>or just press Enter/Return to get the default option.
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop-back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. Thus
permits any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3 (each separated by
at least one space) to be used. The options may define commands, other syntax
diagrams, or command arguments). The loop-back construction may form an
exception to the rule of reading from top left to bottom right.
The simplified format
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
2.1.3 Standard Command Tools
Command Tool is a generic term covering command arguments (or atoms) and command
parts. Both classes of command tool fit into ordinary commands and provide different ways
>- - - +- - - ABC - - - - - .
| |
| - - - PQR - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <di a> - - - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
. - - - - - - <- - - - - - .
/ |
>- - - *- - - opt i on1 - - - |
| |
| - - - opt i on2 - - - |
| |
- - - opt i on3 - - - +- - - >
. - - - - <- - - - - .
/ |
>- - - *- - - name - - +- - - >
of stating a particular requirement. Command tools may be PDMS-wide or module-specific.
This section describes the standard Command Tools that may be used in PARAGON,
SPECON or PROPCON. They may be one of the following:
Standard Command Tools - which fit into ordinary commands
External Macro Facilities - which can be used in a stored macro file and which control
the behaviour of the macro when it is executed
Standard Concepts - which apply globally within PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON
Some of the main command tools (or the PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON variations of
them) summarised for convenience:
Command Arguments
Command arguments are also called atoms because they cannot be broken down any
further. They are individual units which PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON can recognise
as constituents of a complete command. They usually need to be separated by spaces so
that they are individually distinguishable. Command arguments are distinguished from the
other command parts by being written in lower case italics. The principal command
arguments are:
Note: There must be a space before and after each of these command arguments.
integer
a positive or negative whole number, e.g. 2 -5 25
value
a signed number with or without a decimal point, e.g. 2.5 5 -3.8
letter
a single alphabetic character
word
a sequence of up to four letters with significance to PDMS
text
a string of alphanumeric or symbol characters, which may include
spaces, enclosed between single closing quotation marks ... or |...|
characters. This is normally used to add descriptive material to an
appropriate attribute. For example, DUTY Low Pressure. (Note that
paired quotation marks ... will not work.)
space
the space bar (not usually specified unless of special significance)
name
a sequence of characters preceded by a / character and representing a
PDMS Element name, e.g. /VALVE1.
filename
an external file name of the format /filename
varid
an identifier (for use with the VARIABLE command within macros) of the
format !name, where name is a text string. For example: !COUNTER
!height
comma
the , character, which can be used to concatenate PARAGON, SPECON
or PROPCON commands; for example: NEW UNIT, BUNI INCH, DUNI
FINC
plus minus
the +, -, * and / characters, which can be used within
star solid
expressions, for example: (1 +2), (1 - 2), (1 * 2), (1 / 2)
12.0 1 2:4
Command Parts
Command parts are subsets of the general command syntax which are used frequently
within other command sequences. The following command parts are summarised here:
Expressions
Any mathematical, logical or alphabetical expression whose result replaces it in the
command syntax.
Dimensions
A physical dimension entered using default or explicit units.
Catalogue Element Types
A word used to represent a specific type of element in the Catalogue database hierarchy.
Element Identifiers
Methods for specifying which database element you want your next commend to act upon.
Cursor-picking Identifier (<sgid>)
This command part defines the most general method of identifying an Element. The
command is completed by picking an element using the cursor in a graphical view.
Expressions (<eval>)
If a value given within a command needs to be calculated from other known values, you can
enter an expression from which the required result is to be evaluated by PARAGON,
SPECON or PROPCON as it executes the command. Such an expression must be
enclosed between parentheses (...) to identify where it begins and ends.
Full details of the expression syntax are given in the Plant Design Software Customisation
Guide and Plant Design Software Customisation Reference Manual, and are also available
as on-line help.
Dimensions (<uval>)
Once the working units have been specified, all dimensions input subsequently will be
assumed to be in those units unless you override them. (Note that these are simply specific
examples of the use of real expressions. You can include explicit units of measurement
when entering a value in any expression.)
Examples
Note: On output, values are rounded by default as follows:
millimetres to the nearest millimetre
inches to the nearest 1/32 or 0.1 inch.
However, rounding on output may be controlled by using the PRECISION command.
Within PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON, values are stored as accurately as the
host computer will allow.
Catalogue Element Types (<snoun>)
This command part refers to an element type in the Catalogue hierarchy.
Catalogue administrative elements:
Piping Components:
Profile Components:
Joint Components:
5 5 in current working units
5.5 EX 3 5500 in current working units
5.3/4 5.75 in current working units
5 5 feet (only use when working units are FINCH)
56 5 feet 6 inches (only use when working units are FINCH)
56.3/4 5 feet 6.75 inches (only use when working units are FINCH)
5 INCHES 5 inches (regardless of current working units)
5 M 5 metres (regardless of current working units)
56.3/4 IN 5 feet 6.75 inches (regardless of current working units)
WORLd CATAl ogue SECTi on STSEct i on
CATEgor y STCAt egor y TEXT
SCOMponent COMPonent number
SPRFi l e PROFi l e number
SJ OI nt J OI Nt number
12.0 1 2:6
Fitting Components:
Note: FITTing number is not a valid option)
3D Geomset elements:
Negative 3D Geomset elements:
Structural Geomset elements:
3D Pointset elements:
Structural Pointset elements:
Dataset elements:
Detailing Text elements:
SFI Tt i ng
GMSEt SBOX SDIsc SDIsk
SCOne LSNout SDSH BOXIng
SSLCylinder SSPHere LCYLinder SCYLinder
LINes SCTorus SREVolution SRTorus
TUBe LPYRamid SEXTrusion SLOOp
SVERtex
NGMSet NSBOx NSCOne NLSNout
NSDSh NSSLcylinder NSSPhere NLCYlinder
NSCYlinder NSCTorus NSREvolution NSRTorus
NLPYramid NSEXtrusion SLOOp SVERtex
GMSSet SRECtangle SANNulus SPROfile
SPVErtex
PTSEt PTAXi PTCAr PTMIx
PTSSet PLINe
DTSEt DATA
SDTExt DTEXt number
Material Text elements:
Bolt Table elements:
Connection Table elements:
Units elements:
Group World elements:
Part World elements:
Specification World elements:
Table World elements:
Specific Element Identifier (<gid>)
This command part identifies a specific element either explicitly or by reference to its relative
position in the database hierarchy.
SMTExt MTEXt number
BLTAble BLISt SBOLt LTABle
MBOLt MBLIst DTABle
CCTAble COCO
UNIT MSET MTYPe ATLIst
USECtion UDEFinition
GPWL GROUp
PRTWLD
SPWL SPECi SELEc SPCOm
BRTAB NOTAB
12.0 1 2:8
Examples
Cursor-picking Identifier (<sgid>)
This command part defines the most general method of identifying an Element. The
command is completed by picking an element using the cursor in a graphical view.
Examples
/VALVE10 Named catalogue element
SAME Previous element accessed
OWN Owner of Current Element
NEXT 2 2nd element in member list order at same level
4 4th member of Current Element
LAST 3 MEM 3rd last member of Current Element
END Next element up in hierarchy
SECT Section above Current Element
CATE 3 3rd Category
ID @ Lowest level element hit by cursor
ID SBOX @ Box primitive hit by cursor
ID SCOM @ Piping Component hit by cursor
General PDMS Commands
3 General PDMS Commands
The commands in this section are available throughout PDMS.
3.1 Entering PARAGON or SPECON
The commands for PARAGON and PROPCON are combined within the PARAGON module
so that you do not need to switch between modules. The SPECON commands are within
the distinct SPECON module. To access them from the PARAGON module it is necessary to
switch to the SPECON module.
To enter PARAGON type PARAGONMODE.
To enter SPECON type SPECONMODE.
Commands within PROPCON are accessed from within the PARAGON module so it is not
necessary to switch to a PROPCON module.
3.2 Leaving PARAGON or SPECON
At any point during a PARAGON or SPECON session, you can elect to leave and enter
another module of PDMS. This is simply a matter of inputting the name of the module to be
accessed. At this point, PARAGON or SPECON will automatically save the results of the
working session and change to the new module. However, all graphical displays, forms and
menus will need to be redefined at the beginning of the next session. In order to avoid
having to redefine a view and screen layout, it is possible to save the current status of a
working session by use of the RECREATE command.
3.3 Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status
Note: Forms resized or moved using the cursor will be INSTALLed to their original size.
Keyword: PARAGON or SPECON
Description: This command is available throughout PDMS, allowing PARAGON or
SPECON to be accessed at any time.
Keyword:
RECREATE INSTALL
Description: If the intention is to leave PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON for a short
period only this facility allows the display definition and status (including
the full forms and menus set) to be saved, for restoration later.
12.0 1 3:2
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - RECReat e - - +- - DI SPl ay - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - name - - +- - OVERwr i t e - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
>- - I NSTALL SETUP name - - >
3.4 Saving Work and Updating Databases
RECREATE /PARA1 - saves the display status in file /PARA1
RECREATE /PARA1 OVER - as above, but an existing file /PARA1 is overwritten
RECRE DISPLAY /PARA1 - saves nodal settings, e.g. units, representation etc.
- Read back in using $M/name
INSTALL SETUP /PARA1 - restores the display definition stored in file /PARA1
Keyword:
SAVEWORK GETWORK
Description: These two commands are complementary. SAVEWORK lets you update
the databases to incorporate any changes you have made during your
current PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON session (since your last
SAVEWORK). GETWORK lets you refresh your view of all READ or
Multiwrite databases to pick up any changes that others may have made
since you first opened them.
Both commands can be restricted to specific databases within the current
MDB by following them with a list of numbers. These numbers represent
specific databases in the order they appear in the output of the STATUS
command, which may be given in MONITOR or in the MDB mode of any
GUI module. If no database numbers are given, then the commands
apply to the whole MDB.
It is good practice to use SAVEWORK frequently, to ensure maximum
data security. However, it should only be necessary to use GETWORK
when there are specific changes that you wish to pick up (in which case it
is likely that you will know which databases you will actually want to
refresh). GETWORK slows subsequent database access because the
information has to be re-read from disk, and should be avoided unless
you really need to use it.
3.5 Exit from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON without
Saving Changes
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - QUI T - - +- - modulename - - .
| |
| - - FI Ni sh - - - - - - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
3.6 Saving the Alpha Readout to File
Note: After an ALPHA file has been opened, subsequent output will be directed to both the
file and the screen until the file is closed, or until you change to another PDMS
module.
Keyword:
QUIT FINISH
Description: This command exits from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON without
saving any changes or the display setup. QUIT has the effect of
deleting any changes made since the last SAVEWORK, module
change or MDB change.
QUIT Exit from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON (to MONITOR module)
QUIT DESIGN Exit from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON to DESIGN module
QUIT FINISH Exit from PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON and from PDMS (returns
to operating system)
Keywords:
ALPHA LOG ALPHA FILE
Description: This facility lets you save the alpha display information to a text file in the
computer operating system. Two types of output are available, depending
on the command used.
ALPHA LOG enables the contents of either or both of the COMMANDS
and REQUESTS alpha regions to be written to a file.
ALPHA FILE enables the contents of the REQUESTS region only to be
written to file.
The ALPHA LOG/ ALPHA FILE facilities may be used to save data or as a
general output facility.
12.0 1 3:4
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - ALPha - - +- - LOG - - +- - name - - +- - OVERwr i t e - - .
| | | |
| | | - - APPend - - - - - |
| | | |
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - COMMands - - .
| - - END - - > | |
| | - - REQuest s - - |
| | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- >
|
- - FI LE - - +- - name - - +- - OVERwr i t e - - .
| | |
| | - - APPend - - - - - |
| | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
- - END - - >
3.7 Audible Error Trace
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - ALARM - - +- - ON - - - .
| |
- - OFF - - +- - >
ALP LOG /LF1 COMMANDS - log information displayed in the COMMANDS region in
file /LF1
ALP LOG /LF1 OVER COMM - as above, but overwrite existing file /LF1
ALP LOG /LF2 - log information displayed in both alpha regions in file /LF2
ALP FILE /LF2 - log information displayed in REQUESTS region only
ALP LOG END - finish logging information
ALP FILE END
Keywords:
ALARM
Description: When a macro error occurs, there is an audible alarm at the workstation
to signal that the error has occurred. Occasionally, macro errors can be
anticipated and no audible warning is required. This command allows the
audible warning to be switched on or off either interactively or via a
macro.
If the audible warning is ON, it will sound whenever an error alert is
displayed.
ALARM ON - Switches the audible tone on (this is the default).
ALARM OFF - Suppresses the audible tone until it is turned on again.
3.8 Switching Text Output Off
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - TRAce - - +- - ON - - - .
| |
- - OFF - - +- - >
3.9 Defining Colours
Definitions:
The Active colour is used for the catalogue component being worked on (the
significant element, e.g. ELBO, VALV). If the current element is a geometric primitive,
the active colour is used for all primitives owned by the significant element except the
current primitive.
The CE colour is used for the element currently being accessed (i.e. the element
highlighted in the Members list). This may be either a primitive or a significant element.
The Visible colour is used for any element in the display other than those to which the
active or CE colours apply.
The Active and Visible elements together constitute the Draw List.
Keywords:
TRACE
Description: This command, applicable in TTY mode only, controls the automatic
output of the Current Element name and attributes. With Trace set to ON,
the attributes display is automatically updated for each element
accessed. With Trace set to OFF, the attribute display is not changed.
When macros are being run, TRACE is always set to OFF automatically.
TRACE OFF - Stops the automatic output of attribute data.
TRACE ON - Restarts automatic output of Current Element name and attributes.
Keywords:
COLOUR ACTIVE CE VISIBLE AIDS
Description: These commands allow colours to be defined so that the status of
different types of item in the display may be distinguished by means of
colour. The colours used have default settings, but these may be
redefined.
The colours may be assigned by using the COLOUR command to define
the Red-Green-Blue mix for a colour number or to assign a predefined
colour mix by name. PARAGON, SPECON or PROPCON allows the use
of 100 user-definable colours, plus some speciffic ones which are
assigned to items which need to be readily distinguishable in the display.
12.0 1 3:6
The predefined colour mixes which you may specify by name are as follows:
Colour Red Green Blue
black 0 0 0
white 100 100 100
whitesmoke 96 96 96
ivory 93 93 88
grey 66 66 66
lightgrey 75 75 75
darkgrey 32 55 55
darkslate 18 31 31
red 80 0 0
brightred 100 0 0
coralred 80 36 27
tomato 100 39 28
plum 55 40 55
deeppink 93 7 54
pink 80 57 62
salmon 98 50 44
orange 93 60 0
brightorange 100 65 0
orangered 100 50 0
maroon 56 14 42
yellow 80 80 0
gold 93 79 20
lightyellow 93 93 82
lightgold 93 91 67
yellowgreen 60 80 20
springgreen 0 100 50
green 0 80 0
forestgreen 14 56 14
darkgreen 18 31 18
cyan 0 93 93
turquoise 0 75 80
The default colour assignments are:
aquamarine 46 93 78
blue 0 0 80
royalblue 28 46 100
navyblue 0 0 50
powderblue 69 88 90
midnight 18 18 31
steelblue 28 51 71
indigo 20 0 40
mauve 40 0 60
violet 93 51 93
magenta 87 0 87
beige 96 96 86
wheat 96 87 70
tan 86 58 44
sandybrown 96 65 37
brown 80 17 17
khaki 62 62 37
chocolate 93 46 13
darkbrown 55 27 8
Colour No Colour
Current element yellow
Visible elements lightgrey
1 grey
2 red
3 orange
4 yellow
5 green
6 cyan
7 blue
8 violet
9 brown
Colour Red Green Blue
12.0 1 3:8
Examples:
Note: When colours are mixed in their Red, Green and Blue constituents, the command
line must contain values for all three constituents in the correct order. The numbers
entered for the relative proportions of the basic colours must each be in the range 0-
100, but they are not percentages of the overall colour and so do not need to add up
to 100.
Command Syntax:
>- - COLour - +- integer - .
| |
| - ACTI VE - - |
| |
| - CE - - - - - - |
| |
- VI SI bl e - +- colour_name - - >
|
- MI X RED integer GREen integer BLUe integer - - >
where colour_name is the name of any of the predefined colour mixes listed above.
Querying:
>- - Q COLour - - +- - i nt eger - - - - - .
| |
| - - ACTI VE - - - - - - |
| |
| - - CE - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - VI SI bl e - - - - - +- - >
10 white
11 pink
12 mauve
13 turquoise
14 indigo
15 black
16 magenta
COL 5 DARKGREEN Colour 5 will be changed to dark green
COL 3 MIX RED 50 GRE 50 BLU 5 Colour 3 will change to the specified mix of red, green
and blue
COL VISIBLE BRIGHTRED Sets the colour for displaying components to bright
red
Colour No Colour
Current element yellow
4 Catalogues and Specifications
This section gives an overview of the structure of a typical Catalogue DB, which contains
information about standard piping and structural components available in a PDMS project,
and explains how the Specifications are used within this hierarchy. For more detailed
explanations of the setting up of a Catalogue DB, see the PARAGON Reference Manual.
Note: Words of four or five uppercase characters in this chapter represent PDMS elements
(for example, CATA, BLTAB, SPREF). PDMS stores these as four character names
only; the fifth character is given here to make the abbreviations easier to understand.
For example, SPREF (rather than SPRE) is used for Specification Reference
Note: The elements referred to throughout this manual by the names COMP, FITT, DTEXT
and MTEXT are stored in the PDMS database hierarchy as SCOM, SFIT, SDTE and
SMTE elements, respectively. The simplified names, which omit the S prefix, are
used here because they are easier to interpret as you read the manual.
4.1 Catalogue DB
The information held in a Catalogue DB is split into several functional groups which together
completely define every aspect of the components listed within that catalogue. These
functional groups, which are the highest level elements in the Catalogue DB below WORLD,
are shown in Figure 4:1.: The top-level structure of a Catalogue DB.
Figure 4:1. The top-level structure of a Catalogue DB
The functions of the individual types of element are as follows:
12.0 1 4:2
That part of the hierarchy below a Catalogue element which is relevant when considering
Specifications is shown in Figure 4:2.: Part of the structure of a CATA element. (The options
CATE, STCAT and TEXT have been omitted; see the PARAGON Reference Manual for a
fuller explanation.)
Figure 4:2. Part of the structure of a CATA element
CATA Component Catalogue elements hold the physical descriptions of
both piping and structural components (Geomsets, Pointsets etc.),
plus any text used to describe the components in schedules, on
isometrics etc. It is primarily the elements below CATA which will
be accessed via the Specifications.
SPWLD Specification World elements hold the detailed Specifications
which enable you to select suitable components from the CATAs
for a given purpose. It is the elements below SPWLD which are
manipulated by SPECON and which are, therefore, of most
relevance in this manual.
CCTAB Connection Compatibility (COCO) Tables hold lists of all
compatible types of connection.
BLTAB Bolt Tables contain details of all bolts needed to connect flanged
components together in any legal combinations. The BLTAB
members will be referenced from the Specifications for appropriate
types of component.
UNITS Dimensional Unit elements define the default units of
measurement for geometric information.
GPWLD Group Worlds hold definitions of any groups of elements which
may have been created. See the DESIGN Reference Manual for
further details.
PRTWLD Part Worlds hold definitions of any part families that may have
been created.
TABWLD Table Worlds hold definitions of any Coco, Branch or Reducer
tables that may have been created.
4.2 Content and Format of a Specification
The component Specifications, which define the availability of components for particular
types of use, are held in the SPWLD (Specification World) Elements of the Catalogue DB.
These elements, which are at the same hierarchic level as the CATA elements, can own the
simple hierarchy of elements shown in Figure 4:3.: The structure of a SPWLD element.
Figure 4:3. The structure of a SPWLD element
A SPEC is equivalent to an engineering specification for a given class of piping or structural
component. It may contain all components of a given material, for example carbon steel, or
all components for a given class of use, for example all piping components with a particular
pressure rating. Such a SPEC comprises tabulated data of the type illustrated in Figure 4:4.:
Part of a typical Specification for piping components, where each headed question column
represents a SELEC and each horizontal row represents an SPCOM.
SECT Piping Section and Structural Section elements are administrative
STSECT subdivisions of the owning CATA element.
COMP Component elements hold the definitions of piping components. These
definitions comprise pointers to GMSET (Geomset) and PTSET
(Pointset) elements, plus lists of parameters which specify the exact
type, size and geometry of each component (that is, the components
Attributes, including its GTYPE).
PROF Profile, J oint and Fitting elements hold the definitions of corresponding
JOIN structural components. These definitions comprise pointers to GMSET,
FITT GMSSET, PTSET and PTSSET elements, plus lists of specific
attributes, in a similar way to COMP elements.
DTEXT Detailing Text elements hold text which may be used to describe
components in schedules and on isometrics. (They also hold the SKEYs
which define the symbols used to represent components in isometric
drawings; see the PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual.)
MTEXT Material Text elements hold text which may be used to describe the
materials of construction of the components.
12.0 1 4:4
It is possible to allocate a default value to most SELEC options, to be used if that particular
attribute is not defined during the selection process. The default setting is shown in the
tabulated SPEC immediately below the corresponding column heading (the SELEC
element) for that attribute.
Note: Default values are not allowed for NAME or TYPE, or for reference pointers such as
CATREF and DETAIL.
It is also possible to define overall specification pointers and settings which apply to the
whole SPEC, not just to individual SPCOMs. These are shown at the top of the SPEC
listing, before the Heading, as shown by the entries MATREF, FLUREF, RATING and
LINETYPE in Figure 4:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components.
The meanings of the various parts of the Specification, and lists of valid attributes
(corresponding to the column headings) which apply to particular types of component
specification, are detailed in Details of Typical Specifications.
Figure 4:4. Part of a typical Specification for piping components
4.3 How Component Selection Works
This section explains how the tabulated Specification (SPEC) data is used to choose an
appropriate piping component from the complete catalogue. Similar principles apply to
structural components and equipment nozzles, although for these you may also use the
catalogue without a Specification.
The SELEC elements are generated automatically from the tabular SPECON input for a
given SPEC and hold all information about those attributes of a component which determine
its availability for a given purpose. For any given set of design criteria, the route through the
SELECtors follows a question and answer sequence to determine which SPCOM is
suitable. Each question relates to a specific item in the specification and each answer leads
to the next relevant question in a logical progression. Any given combination of answers
should correspond to one, and only one, SPCOM.
The types of information considered at the SELEC decision points for PDMS piping
components might include:
Generic type; for example, BEND, TEE, VALV etc.
Bore(s)
Angle(s) between multiple inlets/outlets and so on.
In addition to these specifying attributes, each SPCOM contains a pointer to a COMP, which
meets all the listed specifications, in a CATA element. It is this pointer, known as the
Catalogue Reference (CATREF), which forms the key to correct component selection
when new pipework is being designed.
Each SPCOM also contains pointers to detailing text (DETAIL points to DTEXT), material
text (MATXT points to MTEXT), bolting requirements (BLTREF points to BLTAB),
component properties (CMPREF points to CMPT in a Properties DB) and part
requirements (PRTREF).
If the PRTREF is set in the macro then the CATREF, DETAIL MATXT, CMPREF and
BLTREF values do not need to be set as these attributes will be copied from the PART
element when the spec is created.
There are two essential links which ensure that an appropriate component is selected
during the design of new pipework or a new structure, namely:
Design Component to Specification
Specification to Catalogue Component
Thus, when a new pipe component is to be selected for inclusion in a Design DB, the
following sequence is applied:
The design component is allocated a Specification Reference (SPREF) which is
selected from the required SPEC. You usually define the Pipe Specification (PSPEC)
as soon as you create a new pipe, and this is then applied to all components which the
Pipe owns unless you override it.
The SPREF points to an SPCOM (in the Catalogue DB).
The SPCOM points to a suitable catalogue component (COMP) via the CATREF
pointer.
(The SPCOM also points to a DTEXT via the DETAIL pointer, an MTEXT via the MATXT
pointer, a BLTAB element via the BLTREF pointer, and a CMPT element in a Properties DB
via the CMPREF pointer, as appropriate.) This is illustrated below.
12.0 1 4:6
Figure 4:5. The links between Design Data, Specifications and Catalogue
Example:
As an illustration of the principles of the selection process, consider the following question
and answer sequence which might apply when choosing a valve from the /RF300
Specification represented in Figure 4:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping
components:
SELEC_1 TYPE?
Answer VALV, which leads to the next question ...
SELEC_2 PBOR0?
Answer 25.0, which leads to a choice of three STYPs
SELEC_3 STYP?
Answer GA, which in this example offers only one choice for SHOP
SELEC_4 SHOP?
Answer TRUE
The resulting combination of SELEC answers, namely a 25mm bore Gate Valve with its
SHOP attribute set to TRUE, is represented in the SPEC by one, and only one, SPCOM,
namely */25GA. This points to the component in the Catalogue which completely matches
the specification, via the CATREF /VGAFF. The corresponding descriptive DTEXT is pointed
to by the DETAIL /DGA.V.SW, and so on. Note that the CATREF is unique within this SPEC,
whereas the same DETAIL applies to other components such as */20GA.
PARAGON
General Description
1 General Description
PARAGON enables you to generate or modify a PDMS Catalogue, with facilities for
constructing Catalogue Components under fully interactive visual control, including 3D
colour-shaded representations of the items being designed.
PARAGON combines aspects of both catalogue creation and model design functionality
within a single module. This means that a catalogue designer not only has write access to a
projects Catalogue databases, but may also read data from the DESIGN databases. If
given write access, the catalogue designer could also experiment with new catalogue
component configurations in a trial DESIGN database. This approach simplifies catalogue
maintenance and design. Similarly, it is often useful for a Plant Design engineer to have
access to the Catalogue to query details of specific components.
PARAGON has a Graphical User Interface consisting of forms and menus. The interface
provides access to the most commonly used facilities. To enter direct command syntax, use
the Display>Command Line menu option to open a special window which accepts
command inputs and displays system outputs.
This part is a Reference Manual for PARAGON. It describes all of the PARAGON
keyboard-entered commands in detail. If you need information on how to use PARAGON to
carry out the principal Catalogue design activities with minimal use of the keyboard, by
using the graphical Forms and Menus interface, refer to the on-line help for the PARAGON
applications.
12.0 2 1:2
General Description
Catalogue Database
2 Catalogue Database
This chapter details the structure of the PDMS Catalogue database.
Note that words of four or five uppercase characters which appear in this chapter (for
example, CATA, BLTA, SPREF) are PDMS element names. When an elements member list
is queried in PDMS, each element type will be displayed as a four-character name. Five or
six characters are occasionally used in this chapter where this gives a PDMS name which
is closer to the elements English name, for example SPREF (instead of SPRE) for
Specification Reference.
2.1 What is the Catalogue For?
The Catalogue in PDMS serves a purpose similar to a parts catalogue to which a pipework
designer or structure designer would refer when using conventional design methods. It
contains details of all available components (piping and structural), including their
dimensions, geometry and drawing symbols. Whereas the conventional parts catalogue is a
book held in the DESIGN Office, the PDMS Catalogue is a database held on the computer.
2.2 Principal Features of the Catalogue Database
If a new Catalogue database (DB) is required, PARAGON can be used to construct it - see
Manipulating the Catalogue Database for details of creating and manipulating a Catalogue
DB using PARAGON.
The Catalogue data is held according to a strict hierarchy which is similar in form to that of
the Design data.
When a Component is selected by the designer using DESIGN, a Specification Reference
(SPREF) is identified and held in the DESIGN database. The SPREF points to a
Specification Component (SPCOM) in the Specification. This in turn points to a Catalogue
Component (SCOM, SPRF, SJ OI, SFIT, etc.) in the Catalogue (see Figure 2:1.:
Interrelationship between Design Data, Catalogue and Specifications).
Whereas the Design data is specific to a particular DESIGN, Catalogues and Specifications
may be specific to a company but general to a number of projects in that company. For
example, the same Catalogue Component may be referred to many times in a particular
design and may also appear in other design projects proceeding at the same time.
Catalogues are usually built up as a library of catalogue macros. A selection of these
macros can then be used to build up a project-specific Catalogue database containing only
those Components which might be used on that project.
12.0 2 2:2
Catalogue Database
Figure 2:1. Interrelationship between Design Data, Catalogue and Specifications
2.3 Structure of the Catalogue Database
Catalogues are constructed as a hierarchy of elements. Each element has certain
attributes and some may contain further member elements. The complete Catalogue
hierarchy is shown in Figure 2:2.: The Catalogue Database Hierarchy.
Note that in any discussion of attributes which may appear in the rest of this chapter, the
standard attributes of TYPE, NAME, OWNER and LOCK will not be mentioned, as these
are common to all the elements described below.
In addition, user-defined attributes (UDAs) may be used with Catalogue database elements
- see the LEXICON Reference Manual for details.
Design Element
Catalogue Component
Detailing Text Elements
Spec Component
SPREF
CATREF
DETAI
Design Specification Catalogue
Catalogue Database
Figure 2:2. The Catalogue Database Hierarchy
2.4 Catalogue (CATA)
CATA is the highest level element of the Catalogue hierarchy. Its attributes include:
DESC - a text description of the catalogue.
WORLD
CATA GPWL BLTA CCTA SPWL UNIT
SECT STSE
COCO
SCOM
GMSE
PTSE DTEX
MTEX
CATE
SBOX
BOXI
LSNO
SSPH
LCYL
SCYL
SSLC
SDIS
SCTO
SRTO
LINE
TUBE
SDSH
LPYR
PTCA
PTAX
PTMI
SPRF GMSS PTSS
SDTE
SMTE
STCA
SJ OI
SFIT GMSE PTSE
PTCA
PTAX
PTMI
SBOX
BOXI
LSNO
SSPH
LCYL
SCYL
SSLC
SDIS
SCTO
SRTO
LINE
TUBE
SDSH
LPYR
PLIN SREC
SANN
BLIS LTAB
SBOL DTAB
MSET USEC
MTYP UDEF
ATLI
SCOM = COMP
SPRF = PROF
SJ OI = J OIN
SFIT = FITT
SDTE = DTEX
SMTE = MTEX TEXT elements, which can
appear at several positions in the
hierarchy, have been omitted for
clarity.
GROU SPEC
SELEC
SPCO
(Piping Catalogue) (Steelwork Catalogue)
(Connections) (Bolts) (Units) (Specifications) (Groups)
CATE/STCA (Category) elements
are optional. Their members can be
owned directly by a SECT/STSE.
NOTES:
NGMS
NSBO
NLSN
NSSP
NLCY
NSCY
NSSL
NSCT
NSRT
NLPY
SPRO
SPVE
SLOO
SEXT
SVER
DTSE
DATA
DTSE
DATA
NSEX
SLOO
SVER
Any negative 3D primitive (as shown below NGMS)
can also be owned by any positive 3D primitive.
NSDS
SCON NSCO SCON
SEXT
SLOO
SVER
GMSE
BLTP
For ease of interpretation in text:
MBLI
MBOL
SREV SREV NSRE
12.0 2 2:4
Catalogue Database
PURP - a PDMS word showing the specific purpose for which that catalogue is
intended. This should be set to the same word as the Specification with which it is to be
used; e.g. PIPE, FITT.
CSTA - the Catalogue standard.
A CATA can contain a number of Catalogue Sections. These are of two types: Piping
Sections (SECT) and Structural Sections (STSEC). They are the principal administrative
elements by which the Catalogue is divided and arranged. The Catalogue can also contain
Text elements (TEXT) - see General Text Elements.
All elements referred to in a Specification (see the SPECON Reference Guide) must exist
within a CATA hierarchy, although elements may exist within a CATA which are not referred
to by a Specification.
Note that the following elements may also exist within the Catalogue database at the same
level as CATA:
Units World (UNITS)
Connection Tables (CCTAB)
Bolt Tables (BLTAB)
Specification World (SPWL)
Group World (GPWL)
Units, Connection Tables and Bolt Tables are described in Other Uses of PARAGON of this
manual, the latter element type being described in more detail in the ISODRAFT Reference
Manual. Specification World elements are detailed in the SPECON Reference Manual.
2.5 Catalogue Sections (SECT and STSEC) and
Categories (CATE and STCA)
Sections and Categories are administrative elements which let you segregate particular
types of catalogue data into logical parts of the hierarchy. Sections, which subdivide an
overall CATA, are obligatory; Categories, which subdivide Sections, are optional (although
their use is recommended).
There are two types of Catalogue Section: Piping Sections (SECT) and Structural
Sections (STSEC). Both have the following attributes:
DESC - a textual description of the section.
PURP - a PDMS word showing the specific purpose for which that section is intended.
GTYP - a PDMS word showing the generic type for elements contained in the section.
This should be the same word as that used to identify the elements in DESIGN; e.g.
VALV, BEAM.
Similarly, there are two types of Category: Piping Category (CATE) and Structural
Category (STCA). Both have the following principal attributes:
DESC - a textual description of the category.
PURP - a PDMS word showing the specific purpose for which that category is
intended. This should be set to the same STYPE as in the Specification with which it is
to be used; e.g. GLOB, GATE etc. for a VALV.
GTYP - a PDMS word showing the generic type for elements contained in the section.
SKEY - a textual symbol key showing how the item is represented in isometric
drawings (see the ISODRAFT Reference Manual).
PTRE - a reference to a 3D P-point Set (PTSE).
Catalogue Database
GMRE - a reference to a 3D Geometry Set (GMSE).
DTRE - a reference to a Data Set (DTSE).
CDET - a reference to Detailing Text (DTEX).
Both types of Catalogue Section or Category contain the elements 3D P-point Set, 3D
Geometry Set, Data Set, Detailing Text and Material Text, as described in Elements Used
in Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category. Piping Sections/Categories may also contain
Piping Components, as described in Elements Used in Piping Sections/Categories.
Structural Sections/Categories may also contain Structural Components (Profiles, Joints
and Fittings), Structural Pointsets, Negative 3D Geometry Sets and Structural
Geometry Sets, as described in Elements Used in Structural Sections/Categories.
2.5.1 Elements Used in Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category
The following elements may be used in either type of Catalogue Section or Category:
3D P-point Set (PTSET) (usually abbreviated to 3D Pointset) - a definition of the
position, direction, connection type and bore of a Components P-points, to be used by
DESIGN, ISODRAFT, etc.
3D Geometry Set (GMSET) (usually abbreviated to 3D Geomset) - a grouping of 3D
primitive elements, defining the dimensions, orientation and obstruction geometry of
each primitive. Used by DESIGN and the Drawing modules.
Data Set (DTSET) (usually abbreviated to Dataset) - a grouping of DATA elements,
holding any catalogue data not stored more specifically elsewhere and which is
required for use in DESIGN or DRAFT; e.g. the cross-sectional area of a structural
steel member calculated from its parameterised dimensions.
Detailing Text (DTEX) - elements containing general descriptive text relating to a
Component. Referred to from SPCOM elements in the Specification. For further details
see Detailing Text.
Material Text (MTEX) - elements containing text describing the material(s) from which
the physical Component is constructed. Referred to from SPCOM elements in the
Specification. For further details see Material Text.
2.5.2 Elements Used in Piping Sections/Categories
A Piping Section or Category may contain all those elements listed in Elements Used in
Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category plus the following:
Piping Component (COMP) - an element defining a piece of pipework. It consists of a
list of values (known as component parameters) and references to a 3D Pointset
element and a 3D Geomset element. The Pointset and Geomset make use of the
component parameter values in defining the size, geometry and connection types of
the Piping Component.
2.5.3 Elements Used in Structural Sections/Categories
A Structural Section or Category may contain all those elements listed in Elements Used in
Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category plus the following:
Structural Pointset (PTSSET) - a definition of the position and direction of a
Components P-lines, to be used by DESIGN.
Negative 3D Geometry Set (NGMSET) (usually abbreviated to Negative 3D
Geomset) - a grouping of 3D negative primitive elements (representing holes, end
12.0 2 2:6
Catalogue Database
preparations etc.), defining the dimensions, orientation and obstruction geometry of
each primitive. Used by DESIGN and the Drawing modules.
Structural Geometry Set (GMSSET) (usually abbreviated to Structural Geomset) - a
grouping of 2D primitive elements, defining the dimensions, orientation and obstruction
geometry of each primitive. Used by DESIGN and the Drawing modules.
Profile (PROF) - a 2D structural Component defining the cross-section of a beam,
column etc. (a Section). It consists of a list of component parameters and references to
a Structural Pointset element and a Structural Geomset element. The Pointset and
Geomset make use of the component parameter values in defining the size and
geometry of the Component. In the design process, a length is associated with a Profile
to produce a Section.
Joint (J OIN) - a 3D structural Component defining a physical means of attaching one
Section to another. It consists of a list of component parameters and references to a
Structural Pointset element, a 3D Pointset element and a 3D Geomset element. The
two Pointsets and the Geomset make use of the component parameter values in
defining the size and geometry of the Component.
Fitting (FITT) - a 3D structural Component defining an object which is physically
attached to a Section but is not part of the structure formed by Sections and J oints. For
example, a Fitting may be used to attach a pipe hanger to a Section. The element
consists of a list of component parameters and references to a 3D Pointset element
and a 3D Geomset element. The Pointset and Geomset make use of the component
parameter values in defining the size and geometry of the Component.
The Catalogue structure as described so far may be used in various ways, but the
recommended method of use is to place only one type of element in each Catalogue
Section, and to place different kinds of Components in different Catalogue Categories. For
example, you might place all 3D Pointsets for Piping Components in one Piping Section and
all 3D Geomsets for Piping Components in another, with separate Piping Sections for equal
tees and reducing tees. When defining Profiles, you might place Profiles for Universal
Beams in one Structural Section, Profiles for Unequal Angles in another, and so on.
2.6 Text (TEXT)
The Text is a general element that can occupy many positions in the hierarchy. It can be
used to store additional information about an owning or adjacent element. The TEXT
element should not be confused with the MTEX and DTEX elements described in Section
Elements Used in Both Types of Catalogue Section/Category. See General Text Elements
for further details.
2.7 Parameters
Parameters define the size, geometry and other characteristics of Components. They are
used in setting the attributes of the Pointsets, Geomsets and Datasets to which Component
elements refer.
All classes of Component can use component parameters, design parameters and
insulation parameters. Structural Components can also use attached and owning design
parameters. Component parameters are defined in the Catalogue; the other classes of
parameters allow characteristics to be set during the design process.
Catalogue Database
2.7.1 Component Parameters
Piping Components (COMP), Profiles (PROF), J oints (J OIN) and Fittings (FITT) all have a
PARAM attribute which lists the component parameters.
Creating Catalogues, Sections and Catalogue Components describes how to set up the
component parameters of a Component. You may define default values which PARAGON
will use if you are working with a Component whose component parameters have not been
set up. The values are set using the MODEL SETTINGS command. For example,
MODEL SETTI NGS PARAM 1 10
defines a default value of 10 for component parameter number 1. See Model Settings for
the full syntax of how to set default values.
These default values are set up only for the current PARAGON session. They are not stored
in the Catalogue DB. You must define the component parameters of a Component before
you use it in the DESIGN DB.
2.7.2 Insulation Parameters
A design element in the DESIGN DB refers to a main Catalogue Component (indirectly) via
its Specification Reference (SPREF) attribute. The design element may also refer to a
second Catalogue Component which defines the insulation of the first Component, via its
Insulation Specification (ISPEC) attribute. The second Component is the Insulation
Component of the design element.
Insulation parameters (IPARAM) allow the main Component to take dimensions from the
Insulation Component. When the main Component uses IPARAM 3, for example, it picks up
the value of the PARAM 3 of the corresponding Insulation Component.
When you define a Catalogue Component using insulation parameters, its dimensions are
not completely specified in the Catalogue. So that PARAGON can give some idea of what
the Component will look like when used in a design, you can define specimen values for the
insulation parameters. These specimen values apply to all Components, unlike the
component parameters which are attributes of a particular Component. The values are set
using the MODEL SETTINGS command. For example,
MODEL SETTI NGS I PARAM 3 25
defines a specimen value for insulation parameter number 3. See Setting Obstruction and
Insulation Representation for the full syntax of how to set values for insulation parameters.
The values are not stored in the Catalogue DB; they are set up only for the current
PARAGON session.
2.7.3 Structural Parameters
These allow J oint and Fitting Components to take dimensions from the Section or Sections
(beam, column, etc.) to which they are physically connected. In this way, a basic design of
J oint or Fitting may be adjusted automatically in the Design DB to fit a connected Section of
any size. (Structural parameters are meaningless for Profiles.)
Structural parameters are of four types:
Attached parameters (APARAM)
Owning parameters (OPARAM)
Design attached parameters (DES APARAM)
12.0 2 2:8
Catalogue Database
Design owning parameters (DES OPARAM).
The types of structural parameter that a Component can use depends on whether it is a
Piping Component, Profile, J oint or Fitting. In the case of a J oint, it also depends on how the
Component is used in the Design DB.
J oints are of two types: primary and secondary. A primary J oint has an attached Section in
the Design DB; a secondary J oint has an attached Section and an owning Section. (See
the DESIGN Reference Manual for details of primary and secondary J oints.) Note that
primary and secondary J oints are represented by the same class of Catalogue Component,
but the settings of their attributes and the attributes of their Pointsets and Geomsets are
different.
A Fitting Component has an owning Section in the Design DB.
Components which have an attached Section (i.e. primary and secondary J oints) can use
attached parameters to define the attributes of their Pointsets and Geomsets. Attached
parameters correspond to the component parameters of the attached Section. For example,
when a J oint component uses APARAM 2, it picks up the value of the PARAM 2 of the
J oints attached Section.
Similarly, Components which have an owning Section (i.e. secondary J oints and Fittings)
can use owning parameters in defining the attributes of their Pointsets and Geomsets.
Owning parameters correspond to the component parameters of the owning Section. For
example, when a J oint or Fitting component uses OPARAM 5, it picks up the value of the
PARAM 5 of the components owning Section.
You can define specimen values for structural parameters in the same way as for insulation
parameters. For example,
MODEL SETTI NGS APARAM 2 300
defines a specimen value of 300 for attached parameter number 2. See Section 5.9? for
the full syntax of how to set values for structural parameters.
2.7.4 Design DB Parameters
These allow structural Components to take dimensions from Design Parameter Arrays in
the Design DB. Each design element has a Design Parameter Array with ten values. (See
the DESIGN Reference Manual for further details.)
Design DB parameters are of three types:
Design parameters (DES PARAM)
Design attached parameters (DES APARAM, structural items only)
Design owning parameters (DES OPARAM, structural items only)
Design parameters allow any component with an SPREF to use values from the design
element which refers to it (via the SPREF). For example, the DES PARAM 4 of a
Component is the fourth value in the Design Parameter Array of the design element. Design
parameters can be used anywhere that component parameters can be used.
Design attached parameters and design owning parameters allow a J oint or Fitting
Component to use values from the design elements which represent its attached and
owning Sections. (Attached and owning sections are explained in Structural Parameters.)
For example, the DES OPARAM 1 of a Component is the first value in the Design
Parameter Array of the design element of its owning Section. Design attached parameters
can be used anywhere that attached parameters can be used. Similarly, design owning
parameters in place of owning parameters.
Catalogue Database
You can define specimen values for Design DB parameters in the same way as for
insulation parameters. For example,
MODEL SETTI NGS DES PARAM 7 9. 5
defines a specimen value of 9.5 for design parameter number 7. See Model Settings for the
full syntax of how to set values for Design DB parameters.
Figure 2:3.: Table of Parameters and Components summarises how the various types of
parameters may be used with the different classes of Component.
Figure 2:3. Table of Parameters and Components
2.8 Catalogue Components
There are four classes of Catalogue Component:
Piping Component
Profile
J oint
Fitting
Their attributes are described in the following sections. These attributes (other than the
component parameters) must be set to actual values (words or references to other
elements). They cannot be defined using parameters.
A reference to an element is usually set to the name of the element, for example /PTSR3,
but it can also be set as a general identifier, for example:
PTSE 4 OF SECT 2 OF CATA / ASA- CATA
The attributes of Pointsets and Geomsets may be defined using component parameters,
design parameters and insulation parameters. Where appropriate, attributes for structural
items may also be defined using design owning parameters and design attached
parameters.
A component parameter may be a numeric value, an expression or a word. (The full syntax
for expressions is defined in the Plant Design Software Customisation Guide.) An insulation
parameter, a structural parameter or a Design DB parameter may only be a numeric value
or an expression. The values assigned to parameters and the use to which they are put, and
the number of parameters used, are arbitrary, depending only on the skill and experience of
Piping
Comp't
Profile Prim'y
Joint
Sec'y
Joint
Fitting
Catalogue Component Parameters
Insulation Parameters
Attached Parameters (Structural)
Owning Parameters (Structural)
Design Parameters (Design DB)
Design Attached Parameters
Design Owning Parameters
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b
b b
b b b b b
b b
b b
Parameter:
Applicable to:
(PARAM)
(IPARAM)
(APARAM)
(OPARAM)
(DES PARAM)
(DES APARAM)
(DES OPARAM)
(COMP) (PROF) (PJOI) (SJOI) (FITT)
12.0 2 2:10
Catalogue Database
the user. Manipulating the Catalogue Database contains examples of the parameterisation
of typical Components.
Catalogue Components do not have member elements.
2.8.1 Piping Component (COMP; SCOM)
The attributes of a Piping Component are:
PTREF - reference to a 3D Pointset element.
GMREF - reference to a 3D Geomset element.
PARAM - the component parameters, a list of values used in the 3D Pointset and 3D
Geomset to define the Component.
GTYPE - a word attribute indicating the generic type of the Piping Component, selected
from the following:
ATTA - attachment
BEND - pipe bend
CAP - end cap
CLOS - closure
COUP - coupling
CROS - cross piece
DUCT - ducting
ELBO - fitting elbow
FBLI - blind flange
FILT - filter
FLAN or FLG - flange
FTUB - fixed length tube
GASK - gasket
HELE - hanger element
INST - instrument
INSU - insulation
LJ SE - lap joint stub end
NOZZ - nozzle
OLET - weldolets
PCOM - pipe component
REDU - reducer
SHU - standard hook-up
TEE - fitting tee
Catalogue Database
The GTYPE must be set as one of the above, otherwise a data consistency check on a
Branch containing the Component (see the DESIGN Reference Manual) will not work
correctly.
DTREF - reference to a Dataset element.
2.8.2 Profile (PROF; SPRF)
The attributes of a Profile are:
PSTREF - reference to a Structural Pointset element.
GSTREF - reference to a Structural Geomset element.
PARAM - the component parameters, a list of values used in the Structural Pointset
and Structural Geomset to define the Component.
GTYPE - a word attribute indicating the generic type of the Profile. Any word value may
be used. The following are suggested:
TRAC - tracing
TRAP - steam trap
TUBE - implied tube
UNIO - union
VALV - valve
VENT - open-ended pipe or vent
VFWA - four-way valve
VTWA - three-way valve
WELD - weld
BEAM - beam
BRAC - brace
COLU - column
GANT - gantry
GIRD - girder
J OIS - joist
PILE - pile
PROF - profile
PURL - purlin
RIDG - ridge
SDRA - side rail
12.0 2 2:12
Catalogue Database
2.8.3 Joint (JOIN; SJOI)
The attributes of a J oint are:
PSTREF - reference to a Structural Pointset element.
PARAM - the component parameters, a list of values used in the Structural Pointset,
3D Pointset and 3D Geomset to define the Component.
GTYPE - a word attribute indicating the generic type of the J oint. Any word value may
be used. The following are suggested:
CTYA - a word attribute indicating how the J oint is fixed to the attached Section (the
J oints connection type for the attached Section). Any word value may be used. If the
connection type attribute of the attached Section (CTYS or CTYE) has not been set
when the J oint is selected in the design process, the attribute will automatically be set
to the value of CTYA. The PDMS data consistency checks (see the DESIGN Reference
Manual) check whether the connection type attributes of the J oint and attached Section
match.
CTYO - similar to CTYA, but for the J oints owning Section (secondary J oints only).
2.8.4 Fitting (FITT; SFIT)
The attributes of a Fitting are:
PARAM - the component parameters, a list of values used in the Structural Pointset,
3D Pointset and 3D Geomset to define the Component.
GTYPE - a word attribute indicating the generic type of the Fitting. Any word value may
be used, but the word FITT is suggested.
CTYA - a word attribute used only if the Fitting is attached to a pipe hanger in the
Design DB. Any word value may be used. If the connection type attribute of the pipe
hanger (HCON or TCON) has not been set when the Fitting is selected in the design
process, the attribute will automatically be set to the value of CTYA. The PDMS data
consistency checks (see the DESIGN Reference Manual) check whether the
connection type attributes of the Fitting and pipe hanger match.
Note: For details of the MODEL SETTINGS command syntax used to set default values
for component parameters, and specimen values for other classes of parameter, see
Model Settings.
BASE - base
J OIN - joint
KNEE - knee
Catalogue Database
2.9 Component Parts
The GPART element allows catalogue components to be fully defined in one place and
without the need for specifications, and these can be used by all disciplines.
The GPART element has the same standard attributes as a SPCO, including CATREF,
DETREF, MATXT, CMPREF and BLTREF, along with other attributes specific to the Part. It
is also possible to add any number of user defined properties to each individual Part.
Parts can be added to the Selection Tables for selecting Parts in the design model, and
these can be used for all disciplines except piping.
For the piping discipline it is possible to add Parts to Piping Specifications in the same way
as SPCOs.
It is possible to select Parts in the design model directly from the catalogue, using filtered
searches.
2.9.1 Hierarchy
Parts are defined under a new Part World hierarchy:
The PRTELEs can be used to define a hierarchy with any number of levels, allowing flexible
grouping of Parts in the database.
2.10 Selection Tables
Selection Tables are used for selecting Component Parts in the design model. They provide
the following methods of selection:
1. Selection Criteria can be used to offer you a choice of Parts based on the current
design context (e.g. captain or crew cabin, inside or outside hull, etc.)
2. Attributes Filters can be used to allow you to search the selection table for Parts with
matchng attributes.
3. A combination of 1 and 2 can be used.
Note: It will also be possible to use attribute filters to select Parts directly from the
catalogue without using selection tables at all, however the use of selection tables is
recommended where only a subset of the whole Part catalogue should be used on a
particular project.
12.0 2 2:14
Catalogue Database
2.10.1 Hierarchy
Selection tables will be stored under a new hierarchy as shown below:
1. The Table Group will contain Selection Tables that are related in some way (at least
one table group for each discipline).
2. The Selection Table will contain one Table Header and numerous Table Items.
3. The Table Header defines the selection questions for that table.
4. The Table Items have a reference to the corresponding Part, and hold the selection
answers for that Part.
Navigating in the Catalogue Database Hierarchy
3 Navigating in the Catalogue Database
Hierarchy
There are many ways in which you can explore the contents of the Catalogue database, but
they fall into three broad categories:
Accessing a Catalogue element whose identity or hierarchical position is known
Accessing a Catalogue element whose position in the hierarchy relative to the current
position is known
Accessing a Catalogue element by picking it from the screen
It is important to appreciate that these navigation facilities provide you with access to the
complete Catalogue and not just those items shown on the graphical display.
3.1 Accessing a Catalogue Element on the Screen
In graphical form, you can jump straight to an element which is shown in the screen display
by positioning the cursor over the element and pressing the left-hand mouse button. This
identifies the item under the cursor and makes it the current element.
Alternatively, the cursor can be used in the Members menu (or the command window) to
pick a name from the text display.
3.2 Accessing a Catalogue Element by Name
You can jump straight to a known element simply by typing its name. You would usually
name an element when you create it.
3.3 Accessing an Element by Reference Number
All elements are automatically given a reference number when created. By stating this
reference it is possible to access an unnamed element. Reference numbers are not
normally shown in PARAGON, but may be obtained by the using the Q REF command.
12.0 2 3:2
3.4 Going to the Previously Accessed Element
Example:
ADD CE - Add t he cur r ent el ement t o t he di spl ay.
Command Syntax:
>- - CE - - >
>- - SAMe - - >
3.5 Ascending the Catalogue Hierarchy
Keywords:
SAME CE
Description: SAME takes you to the element you were at before you accessed
the current element. Repeating the SAME command has the effect
of moving repeatedly between two items - it does not move back
along the list of items accessed.
If the previously accessed element has been deleted, the SAME
command will output an error message.
CE takes you to the current element itself. (This facility may seem
rather pointless in this situation; however the CE keyword is used in
many commands as a means of identifying an element to be the
object of that command.)
Keywords:
OWNER END
Description: Moving up the hierarchy involves fewer decisions than moving
downwards, as any element can have only one Owner. Two
commands (OWNER and END) allow you to move up to the
immediate parent.
END differs from OWNER by allowing you to return to a Group
element from which the current element was accessed. As the
Group does not own that element, the command OWNER would go
to the elements true Owner and not the Group.
It is possible to ascend the hierarchy in more than one step, by
inputting the type of element you wish to access. For example, to
navigate from a Piping Component to its Section would involve two
successive END commands (if a Category exists). However the
command SECT would have the effect of scanning up the hierarchy
to find the Section which owns that list, thus saving an END
command.
3.6 Accessing an Element via a Reference Pointer
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - GOTO - - <r ef at t > - - >
where <refatt>is the name of any reference attribute of the current element whose setting
points to another element.
3.7 Other Navigation Commands
Examples:
FI RST SECT OF CATA / PI PECATA
LAST PTSE OF PREVI OUS 3 SECT
FI RST SCOM OF / CATE 5
Command Syntax:
(See <gid>syntax in Standard Command Tools.)
Keywords:
GOTO
Description: Many elements have reference attributes whose settings point
to associated elements. The latter (referenced) elements hold
data which forms part of the definition of the original (referencing)
element. For example, the geometric definition of a catalogue
component is held in a GMSET (geometry set) element which is
pointed to by the setting of the components GMREF attribute
(see Pointsets and Geomsets).
The GOTO command allows you to navigate directly to a
referenced element by specifying the corresponding reference
attribute of the current element.
GOTO PTREF goes to the PTSET specified by the PTREF setting
GOTO GMREF goes to the GMSET specified by the GMREF setting
Keywords:
FIRST LAST NEXT PREVIOUS MEMBER END TYPE
Description: Most of the above commands can be linked together with
the OF keyword to produce general navigation commands.
12.0 2 3:4
Component Design and Representation
4 Component Design and Representation
This chapter introduces the methods of Component design and graphical representation in
PARAGON; in particular the MODEL, MODEL SETTINGS and REPRESENTATION
commands are detailed.
4.1 Component Design
Assuming that you have opened a suitable 3D view, the interactive graphical Component
design process in PARAGON is initiated using the MODEL command.
If a new Component is to be designed, then a new catalogue element must first be specified
by a command such as
The command
MODEL CE
(for Model Current Element) will add the new component to the 3D view.
Note: The MODEL CE command is valid only for SCOM, SPRF, J OIN, and SFIT elements.
Only complete Components may be displayed in this way - individual Pointsets and
Geomsets may not be, although these items will easily be distinguishable. (Geomset and/or
Pointset elements can be removed from the display with the aid of the REPRESENTATION
command - see next section).
The MODEL SETTINGS command can be used to specify the Component Design Data
attributes. For example,
MODEL SETTINGS DDRADIUS 75 DDHEIGHT 200
gives the Design Data attributes DDRADIUS and DDHEIGHT values of 75mm and 200mm
respectively. The DDRADIUS, DDHEIGHT and DDANGLE attributes are the Design
parameters used in the selection process for variable Components. In PARAGON it is
possible to use these attributes as part of the Component design. For example, whereas an
attribute such as PHEIGHT would normally be defined in terms of parameters, a command
such as
PHEI DDHEIGHT
NEW SCOM /CR2-1 (at SECT or CATE level)
or
NEW SPRF /UB4-A (at STSEC or STCAT level)
12.0 2 4:2
(assuming a suitable current element) would set PHEIGHT to the Design height. (In such a
case, a MODEL SETTINGS command would need to be followed by a MODEL CE
command before any change in the display would be observed.)
To produce a display of a Component with insulation, the bore, temperature and working
pressure of the Component must be known. To this end the MODEL SETTINGS command
can be used to set the BORE, TEMP and PRESSURE. This must be done before the
Insulation Specification, INSPEC, can be specified. For example,
MODEL SETTINGS TEMP 300 BORE 80
would set the temperature and bore Design Data attributes (the pressure would stay at its
default value, see below). The Insulation Spec may then be specified by a command such
as
MODEL SETTINGS INSPEC /INSUL1
Assuming the drawing REPRESENTATION (see Reference Section) is correctly set, the
Component will then be displayed with insulation shown.
All Design settings can be restored to their defaults by
MODEL SETTINGS DEFAULT
Note: This command also deletes all default and specimen values of parameters. It unsets
the Insulation Specification.
The default values of the Design Data attributes, and the full syntax of how to set them, are
given in Reference Section.
QUERY MODEL SETTINGS will output the Design settings currently in use. The Design
process is turned off by
MODEL END
which also has the effect of clearing the display.
4.2 P-point and P-line Representation
4.2.1 P-points
P-points may be displayed in PARAGON in one of two ways. The form of display is
controlled by the REPRESENTATION PPOINTS command as illustrated in Figure 4:1.:
Specifying P-points On or Off.
Figure 4:1. Specifying P-points On or Off
The size of the arrow may also be controlled by the REPRESENTATION PPOINTS
command, as illustrated in Figure 4:2.: Specifying P-point Length. The overall length of the
arrow is specified in millimetres. The default length is 50mm. Specifying a length of zero
causes the P-point to appear as a dot.
Figure 4:2. Specifying P-point Length
The P-point numbers may be omitted, or they may be displayed any size, the size being
specified in millimetres. The default size is 5 mm. The size of the numbers is controlled by
the REPRESENTATION PPOINTS command, as illustrated in Figure 4:3.: Specifying P-
point Number Representation.
Figure 4:3. Specifying P-point Number Representation
Both LENGTH and NUMBERS may be set in the same command, for example:
REPRESENTATION PPOINTS ON LENGTH 25 NUMBERS ON SIZE 7
Note: P-points are always displayed in some form. They cannot be omitted from the display
completely.
See Reference Section at the end of this chapter for the full syntax of the
REPRESENTATION PPOINTS command.
12.0 2 4:4
4.2.2 P-lines
P-lines may be displayed in PARAGON in one of two ways. The form of display is controlled
by the REPRESENTATION PLINES command as illustrated in Figure 4:4.: Specifying P-
lines On or Off.
Figure 4:4. Specifying P-lines On or Off
The P-line identifier keys may be omitted or displayed. This is also controlled by the
REPRESENTATION PLINES command, as illustrated in Figure 4:5.: Specifying P-line
Identifier Key Representation.
Figure 4:5. Specifying P-line Identifier Key Representation
P-line length (default 50mm) and size (default 5mm) can also be controlled. See Reference
Section at the end of this chapter for the full syntax of the REPRESENTATION PLINES
command.
Unlike P-points, P-lines can be omitted from the display completely. Whether a P-line is
drawn or not depends on the settings of three of its attributes:
LEVEL - the drawing level range
CLFLA - the centreline drawing flag attribute
TUFLA - the tube drawing flag attribute
LEVEL is a pair of integers. CLFLA and TUFLA are logical attributes which are set to TRUE
or FALSE (corresponding to ON or OFF respectively). When you first create a P-line,
CLFLA and TUFLA are both FALSE.
Control is initially on the setting of LEVEL. If the PARAGON LEVEL setting is within the
LEVEL range specified for the P-line (as its LEVEL attribute) then the P-line will be
considered for drawing, otherwise it will not be. If the level condition is satisfied, then
whether a P-line is displayed or not in PARAGON depends upon the settings of its CLFLA
and TUFLA attributes and upon the settings of the drawing options specified by the
REPRESENTATION command.
The REPRESENTATION command provides a means of effectively overriding the settings
of the P-lines drawing attributes without changing them. An example REPRESENTATION
command is
REPRESENTATION TUBE ON CL OFF
(The word CENTRELINE may be used instead of CL.)
The drawing option settings interact with the drawing attributes of the P-lines thus: if an ON
REPRESENTATION setting matches a corresponding TRUE attribute setting (e.g.
REPRESENTATION CL ON and CLFL TRUE) then the P-line will be drawn, otherwise it will
not be drawn.
The drawing of Geomset primitives is controlled in a similar way. The next section gives
examples of how the LEVEL, CLFLA and TUFLA attributes interact with the
REPRESENTATION settings.
4.3 Geomset Primitive Representation
Whether a Geomset primitive is displayed or not depends on the settings of its LEVEL,
CLFLA and TUFLA attributes (as for a P-line) and also on its OBST attribute. (The OBST
attribute is a number which defines the degree of obstruction for clash checking.)
If the PARAGON LEVEL setting is within the LEVEL range specified for the primitive (as its
LEVEL attribute), then the primitive will be considered for drawing, otherwise it will not be. If
the level condition is satisfied then, the primitive will be displayed if it has an OBST value of
1 or 2 and the REPRESENTATION setting is
REPRESENTATION OBSTRUCTIONS ON
The primitive will be drawn in solid lines if OBST =2 (hard obstruction), dashed lines if
OBST =1 (soft obstruction0.
The control mechanisms of tube, centreline and obstruction are quite independent of each
other. So, for example, if a primitive has an OBST value of 2 and the REPRESENTATION
setting is OBSTRUCTIONS ON, the primitive will be drawn whatever the values of its
CLFLA and TUFLA attributes and the REPRESENTATION TUBE and CL settings (provided
that the PARAGON LEVEL setting is within the LEVEL range of the primitive).
Note: Whenever you use a REPRESENTATION command, the current design Component
is redrawn. If you want to change several REPRESENTATION settings, put them all
in the same line so that the Component is only redrawn once. For example,
REPRESENTATION TUBE ON CL OFF OBST ON PPOINTS OFF
The following example shows the Catalogue representation of a control valve, and how it
might appear in PARAGON with various combinations of TUBE, CL and OBST settings. All
the illustrations have PPOINTS ON.
12.0 2 4:6
Figure 4:6. Catalogue Control Valve, showing all Primitives
For this example, the settings of the attributes of interest are considered to be:
SCYL 1, SCYL 2 and SDSH 1 are obstruction volume primitives, that is, they represent
the obstruction volume of the Component, not its physical geometry and dimensions. The
other primitives represent the actual geometry and dimensions of the Component.
The following illustrations show the appearance of the Component under various
REPRESENTATION settings.
SCYL 1 - OBST 2, CLFL FALSE, TUFL FALSE
SCYL 2 - OBST 2, CLFL FALSE, TUFL FALSE
SSPH 1 - OBST 0, CLFL TRUE, TUFL TRUE
SCON 1 - OBST 0, CLFL TRUE, TUFL TRUE
SDSH 1 - OBST 2, CLFL TRUE, TUFL TRUE
SCYL 3 - OBST 0, CLFL FALSE, TUFL TRUE
SCYL 4 - OBST 0, CLFL FALSE, TUFL TRUE
LSNO 1 - OBST 0, CLFL FALSE, TUFL TRUE
LSNO 2 - OBST 0, CLFL TRUE, TUFL FALSE
LSNO 3 - OBST 0, CLFL FALSE, TUFL TRUE
LSNO 4 - OBST 0, CLFL TRUE, TUFL FALSE
Figure 4:7. REPRESENTATION OBST OFF TUBE OFF CL ON
This is the default REPRESENTATION setting for OBSTRUCTION, TUBE and
CENTRELINE. The attribute settings chosen for this example are typical for a Catalogue,
and so Figure 4:7.: REPRESENTATION OBST OFF TUBE OFF CL ON shows the normal
appearance of the valve. Notice how the OBST OFF setting does not affect the visibility of
the obstruction dish (handwheel space) since it has CLFL TRUE.
Figure 4:8. REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE OFF CL ON
12.0 2 4:8
Here the OBST ON setting matches the OBST 2 attribute value of the obstruction cylinders
and so they become visible, even though they have CLFL and TUFL both FALSE.
Figure 4:9. REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE OFF CL OFF
Here TUBE and CENTRELINE are both OFF but OBST is ON, and so only the obstruction
volume primitives are visible.
Figure 4:10. REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE ON CL OFF
Compared with Figure 4:9.: REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE OFF CL OFF, those
primitives with TUFL TRUE now become visible because TUBE is now ON. The obstruction
primitives remain visible because OBST is still ON.
Figure 4:11. REPRESENTATION OBST OFF TUBE ON CL OFF
OBST is now OFF and so the obstruction cylinders disappear. (The obstruction dish
remains because it has TUFL TRUE.)
Figure 4:12. REPRESENTATION OBST OFF TUBE ON CL ON
Here, all those primitives which have one or both of CLFL, TUFL TRUE are visible.
12.0 2 4:10
Figure 4:13. REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE ON CL ON
In Figure 4:13.: REPRESENTATION OBST ON TUBE ON CL ON, all the
REPRESENTATION settings are ON and so all the Geomset primitives are visible.
Figure 4:14. REPRESENTATION OBST OFF TUBE OFF CL OFF
Here, all the REPRESENTATION settings are OFF and so no primitives are visible. The
Component P-points are still visible since the REPRESENTATION PPOINTS setting in the
example is ON.
The full default REPRESENTATION is:
CL ON
TUBE OFF
OBSTRUCTI ONS OFF
LEVEL 0
PPOI NTS ON LENGTH 50 NUMBERS OFF
PLI NES ON PKEYS OFF
which is regained by
REPRESENTATION DEFAULT
Note that the TVISIBLE and BVISIBLE end visibility flags have no effect in PARAGON.
4.4 Reference Section
This section gives the syntax of the MODEL SETTINGS command and the
REPRESENTATION command, as described in this chapter and in Catalogue Database
(the latter for setting component parameter defaults etc.).
The description of the syntax for the REPRESENTATION command is spread over a
number of separate sections, each showing how the command is applied to a particular type
of element. The final section summarises the complete REPRESENTATION syntax in a
single diagram.
Querying information is given, as are further examples, where appropriate.
4.4.1 Model Settings
Examples of setting default component parameters:
Keywords:
MODEL SETTINGS
Function: Sets default component parameters and design data attributes.
Description: Sets default values for component parameters and specimen values
for other classes of parameters (see Catalogue Database). Also sets
design data attributes; the numeric attributes may be used in place of
parameters for defining Pointsets and Geomsets.
MODEL SET PAR 3 35 Sets default value for component parameter
3 to 35
MODEL SET IPAR 1 3.5 IPAR 2 4.5 Sets insulation parameter 1 to 3.5 and
insulation
parameter 2 to 4.5
MODEL SET APAR 1 250 Sets attached parameter 1 to 250
MODEL SET APAR 3 5.1 OPAR 2 19.75 Sets attached parameter 3 to 5.1 and owning
parameter 2 to 19.75
12.0 2 4:12
The word CAT (short for CATALOGUE) in the fifth example is optional. You can use it when
setting default values for component parameters, and when setting specimen values for
structural parameters. You may find it helpful to use the word for clarity in macros, to
distinguish between Design DB parameters and other classes of parameters.
Values for any of these classes of parameters may be set in a single command, for
example:
MODEL SET PAR 2 12 IPAR 1 17 APAR 2 32 DES PAR 3 25 DES OPAR 5 6.3
Examples of setting design data attributes:
Default values:
Command Syntax:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- MODEL - SETt i ngs - - +- - *- CATal ogue* - . |
| | - DESi gn - - - - - | |
MODEL SET CAT OPAR 3 2.5 Sets owning parameter 3 to 2.5
MODEL SET DES PARA 3 1.2 Sets design parameter 3 to 1.2
MODEL SET DES APAR 10 99 Sets design attached parameter 10 to 99
MODEL SET DES PAR 2 (ATAN(4 / 3))
Sets design parameter 2 to tan
-1
4/3
MODEL SET DEF Deletes all default and specimen parameters
(also sets Design Data attributes to default
values)
MODEL SET INSPEC /IS50 Set Insulation Specification to IS50
MODEL SET BOR 100 TEMP 350 PRESS 50 Set Component bore, temperature and
pressure to given Design value as
MODEL SET DDHEI 2000 DDRAD 35 Set height and radius to given Design
values
MODEL SET DDANG (ASIN(6 / 7)) Set Design Angle to arcsin (6/7)
MODEL SET DEF Set Design Data attributes to default values
(also deletes all default and specimen
parameters and unsets Insulation Spec)
TEMP -100000
BORE 150.0 mm
PRESSURE 0.0
DDANGLE 90 degrees
DDHEIGHT 100.0 mm
DDRADIUS 225 mm
INSPEC Nulref (i.e. unset)
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- PARam- - . |
| | | - APARam- | |
| | - OPARam- + |
| | | |
| | - I PARam- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - . |
| | . - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | - number - +- value - - - - |
| | - <expr es> - |
| | |
| | - - I NSpec - - - name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - TEMp - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - BORe - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PREssur e - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - DDHEI ght - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - DDRADi us - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| - - DDANGl e - - - +- - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| - - - <expr es> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - - DEFaul t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
Querying Syntax:
>- Q - MODEL - - SETt i ngs - - +- - CATal ogue - - .
| - - DESi gn - - - - - |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - PARam- - - .
| | - - APARam- - |
| - - OPARam- - +
| |
| - - I PARam- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - I NSpec - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - TEMp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - BORe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - PREssur e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - DDHEI ght - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - DDRADi us - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - DDANGl e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
4.4.2 Setting Representation for Piping Components
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION TUBE CL CENTRELINE
Description: The REPRESENTATION command allows piping components to
be represented by a single centreline (CL) or by a 2D outline
(TUBE). In some cases, it helps to switch between the two
representations to simplify an otherwise complicated view.
Switching TUBE On switches CL Off automatically, and vice versa.
TUBE and CL representations are not instantly updated on the
screen. To see the effects of a representation change, it is
necessary to replace the affected item in the Draw List by
Removing and Adding it.
12.0 2 4:14
Examples:
Command Syntax:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - *- - CL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . |
| | |
| - - CENTr el i ne - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | |
| | |
- - TUBE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - ON - - - |
| |
- - OFF - - +- - >
Querying:
4.4.3 Setting Profile Representation for Steelwork
Examples:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - *- - PROFi l e - - +- - CL - - - - - - - - - - . |
| | |
| - - CENTr el i ne - - | |
| | |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - ON - - - |
| |
- - OFF - - +- - >
REPR TUBE ON Sets tubing representation as double line
REPR CL ON Sets tubing representation as centreline
Q REPR TUBE
Q REPR CL
Q REPR - queries all Representation options.
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION PROFILE
Description: The REPRESENTATION PROFILE commands allow structural
steel profiles to be represented by a single centreline or by a 2D
outline. In some cases, it helps to switch between the two
representations to simplify an otherwise complicated view.
Changes to the representation are not instantly updated on the
screen. To see the effects of a representation change, it is
necessary to replace the affected item in the Draw List by Removing
and Adding it.
REPR PROF ON PROF CL OFF Sets profile representation as 2D outline
REPR PROF CL ON PROF OFF Sets profile representation as centreline
REPR PROF ON PROF CL ON Sets both types of representation on
Querying:
4.4.4 Setting Level Representation
Examples:
Command Syntax:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - *- - LEVel - - +- - PI PE - - - - - - - . |
| | |
| - - NOZZl e - - - - - | |
| | |
| - - STRUct ur e - - | |
| | |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - integer - - +- - >
Querying:
Q REPR PROF
Q REPR - queries all Representation options.
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION LEVEL
Description: This command enables individual drawing levels to be specified for
the display of catalogue elements. Every basic primitive shape has
an associated drawing level range attribute stored in the Catalogue.
If the specified drawing level coincides with this range, the 3D
object will be drawn when it is added to the Draw List.
The practical effect of this facility is that it allows you to minimise
visible detail when representing catalogue items. For instance, at
level 3, steelwork may be represented as single line only, whereas
at level 1 the full detail may be visible. Level 3 may well be
adequate for design purposes.
LEVEL manipulation is not instantly updated on the screen. To see
the effects of a level change, use the REPR UPDATE command.
REPR LEVEL PIPE 5 Sets piping level to 5. All pipes which are added after this
command will be drawn at level 5. Those which were already in
the view will remain unchanged.
REPR LEVEL 2 Set level for all other Component types to 2
Q REPR - lists all REPRE options
Q REPR LEVEL - lists levels at which other Components are drawn
Q DISPLAY - gives units and tolerance settings, as well as representation levels
12.0 2 4:16
4.4.5 Setting Obstruction and Insulation Representation
Examples:
REPR OBST ON I NSU OFF
REPR I NSU ON
REPR PROF OBST ON PROF I NSU OFF
Command Syntax:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - *- - OBSTr uct i on - - . |
| | |
| - - I NSUl at i on - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - PROFi l e - - +- OBSTr uct i on - |
| |
- I NSUl at i on - - +- ON - - .
| |
- OFF - +- - >
Querying:
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION OBSTRUCTION INSULATION
Description: Component Obstructions are often given LEVELS or TUBE and
CENTRELINE settings which render them invisible. Setting the
Representation of OBST On forces the system to override normal
LEVEL and TUBE settings and show all of the primitives,
regardless of the other settings.
Setting the Representation of INSU On or Off determines whether
or not insulation is shown on primitives.
These have the effect of considering all primitives which have an
obstruction level greater than zero and all primitives which are
affected by insulation parameters. As with changes to LEVEL
representation, the graphics display is not updated instantly. Use
the RECR UPDATE command to make any changes visible.
Q REPR Lists all Representation settings
Q REPR INSU Queries if INSU is ON or OFF
Q REPR OBST Queries if OBST is ON or OFF
4.4.6 Setting P-Point Representation
Examples:
Command Syntax:
>- - REPResent at i on - PPoi nt s - - +- - ON - - - .
| |
| - - OFF - - |
| |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - .
|
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
|
+- - NUMber s - - +- - ON - - - .
| | |
| - - OFF - - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
Querying:
Q REPR PPOI NTS
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION PPOINTS LENGTH NUMBERS
Description: P-point representation may be set to ON or OFF. The default
setting is PPOINTS OFF, although p-points will be shown
automatically as part of an identification operation.
When p-points are on, they are drawn as small arrows with a cross
at the p-point position and with the arrow indicating the p-point
direction. The size of the arrow is controlled by the LENGTH option.
P-point numbers may also be displayed, as controlled by the
NUMBERS option.
As with changes to other representation settings, the graphics
display is not updated instantly. Items must be removed and re-
added to the Draw List before changes to the display of p-points
becomes visible.
REPR PPOINTS ON Sets the p-point representation to ON
REPR PPOINTS LENGTH 5 Sets size of p-point arrows
REPR PPOINTS NUMB ON Shows p-point numbers
12.0 2 4:18
4.4.7 Setting P-Line Representation
Examples:
Command Syntax:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - *- - PLI Nes - +- ON - - . |
| | | |
| | - OFF - | |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - +- LENgt h - <uval > - |
| | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - PKEYs - - +- ON - - . |
| | |
- OFF - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
Querying:
Q REPR PLI NES
Q REPR PKEYS
4.4.8 Full REPRESENTATION Syntax
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - REPResent at i on - - +- - *- - TUBE - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - CL - - - - - - - - - - . |
| | | |
| | - - CENTr el i ne - - +- <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - HOLEs - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - OBSTr uct i on - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - I NSUl at i on - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
Keywords:
REPRESENTATION PLINES LENGTH PKEY
Description: P-line representation for structural Profiles may be set to ON or
OFF. The default setting is PLINES OFF.
When p-lines are on, the size of the arrow showing their direction is
controlled by the LENGTH option. P-line identifiers, in the form of
the settings of their PKEY attributes (TOS, BOS, NA, etc.) may also
be displayed, as controlled by the PKEY option.
As with changes to other representation settings, the graphics
display is not updated instantly. Use the RECR UPDATE command
to see changes to the display of p-lines.
REPR PLINES ON Sets the p-line representation to ON
REPR PLINES LENGTH 6 Sets size of p-line arrows
REPR PLINES PKEY ON Shows p-line identifiers (settings of PKEY attributes)
| | |
| | - - LEVel - +- PI PE - - - - - - . |
| | | | |
| | | - NOZZl e - - - - | |
| | | | |
| | | - STRUct ur e - | |
| | | | |
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- integer - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PPoi nt s - <onof f > - <ppsi z> - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PROFi l e - +- CL - - - - - - - - - - . |
| | | | |
| | | - CENTr el i ne - - | |
| | | | |
| | | - OBSTr uct i on - | |
| | | | |
| | | - I NSUl at i on - - | |
| | | | |
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- <onof f > - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PNODes - - . . - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - . |
| | | / | |
| | - - SNODes - - *- <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - | |
| | | | |
| | | - COLour - <col no> - | |
| | | | |
| | - - SI Ze - <uval - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - POI Nt s - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PKEYs - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - PLI Nes - <onof f > - +- LENgt h - <uval > - . |
| | | | |
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - |
| | |
| | - - HOLes - <onof f > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - MASSpr oper t i es - <i nt > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| | - - DARCt ol er ance - <uval > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| | |
| \ - - UPDATE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - DEFaul t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
<onoff>is either ON or OFF
<ppsiz>is
>- - +- LENgt h - <uval > - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- NUMber s - <onof f > - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
<colno>is
>- - +- - i nt eger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
| - - ACTi ve - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - VI SI bl e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - CE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - CLASH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - OBST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
12.0 2 4:20
| - - COMPAr e - - +- - MATCHed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . |
| | | |
| | - - MI SMat ched - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | |
| | | |
| | - - UNMAt ched - - +- - CONNect or - - . | |
| | | | | |
| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - | |
| | | |
| - - TEXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - |
| |
- - AI DS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
Pointsets and Geomsets
5 Pointsets and Geomsets
This chapter describes in detail the following Catalogue DB elements:
3D Pointset (PTSET)
Structural Pointset (PTSSET)
3D Geomset (GMSET)
Negative 3D Geomset (NGMSET)
Structural Geomset (GMSSET)
Creation and manipulation of the Catalogue elements is described in Manipulating the
Catalogue Database.
5.1 D Pointsets (PTSET)
A PTSET is a collection of P-point elements. P-points are used in the design process to
position and orientate Piping Components, and to define their connectivity to each other. P-
points may also be used in PARAGON to define the position and orientation of the 3D
Geomset primitives which make up Piping Components, J oints and Fittings. (Profiles do not
use P-points.)
A P-point has a 3D position and a direction, and is identified by a number. Each PTSET
includes a special P-point, P-point zero (P0), whose position is the component origin and
whose direction is the Z axis direction of the Component. It has no other attributes. P0 is
created automatically by PARAGON; you cannot change it in any way.
The numbering of the P-points of Piping Components must follow certain conventions - see
P-point Conventions for Piping Components for a summary of these, and the ISODRAFT
Reference Manual for fuller details. There are no special conventions for numbering the P-
points of J oints and Fittings.
A P-point has a connection type attribute, which is used only when the P-point belongs to
a Piping Component. The connection type attribute can be used to specify how a Piping
Component is connected to another at the position of the P-point, for example by a butt weld
or socket weld.
A P-point has a bore attribute, which is used only when the P-point belongs to a Piping
Component. It can be used to specify the bore of the pipe at that point.
PDMSs data consistency checks (see the DESIGN Reference Manual) can be used to
check that the connection type attributes of Piping Components are compatible with the
corresponding attributes of the Components to which they are connected. The compatibility
of connection types is defined in a Connection Compatibility Table (CCTAB) - see
Connection Compatibility Tables for details.
12.0 2 5:2
Use of the REPRESENTATION command affects how P-points are drawn by PARAGON;
see P-point and P-line Representation for details.
A PTSET has the following attributes:
DESC - a textual description of the Pointset
GTYP - the generic type of the item for which the Pointset is used
SKEY - the Symbol Key to which the Pointset relates (see the ISODRAFT Reference
Manual)
PURP - the purpose of the Pointset
A PTSET may contain one or more of the three types of P-point element:
Axial P-point - PTAXI
Cartesian P-point - PTCAR
Mixed P-point - PTMIX
5.1.1 Axial P-point (PTAXI)
A PTAXI allows a P-point to be defined in terms of an axis and a distance along that axis. A
PTAXI has no member elements and has the following attributes:
NUMB - the P-point number
PCON - the connection type
PBOR - the bore of the P-point
PAXI - the axis of the P-point
PDIS - the distance along the axis of the P-point
PSKEY - the pipe fitting (end condition) type to be used by ISODRAFT
DESC - a textual description of the P-point
PURP - the purpose of the P-point
NUMB must be set as a value. PAXI must be set as a direction - see Defining an Axis for
details. The other attributes may be set as values or words (as appropriate), or in terms of
parameters (which in turn are values or words). The classes of parameter which may be
used depend on the class of Component (Piping Component, J oint or Fitting) which uses
the P-point - see Parameters for details. PCON and PBOR are used for Piping Components
only. They have no meaning if the P-point is used by a J oint or Fitting. For details of PSKEY
settings, see Specifying Pipe End Conditions for use by ISODRAFT.
These conventions also apply to the attributes of the PTCAR and PTMIX elements
described below. See Constructing 3D Pointsets for examples of setting these attributes.
5.1.2 Cartesian P-point (PTCAR)
A PTCAR allows a P-point to be defined by specifying its position and direction explicitly. A
PTCAR has no member elements and has the following attributes:
PX,PY,PZ - the X, Y, Z coordinates of the P-point
PTCDIR - the direction of the P-point
PTCDIR must be set as a direction - see Defining a Direction for details.
5.1.3 Mixed Type P-point (PTMIX)
A PTMIX allows a P-point to be defined by specifying the position explicitly but using PAXI to
specify the direction. A PTMIX has no member elements and has the following attributes:
PX,PY,PZ - the X, Y, Z coordinates of the P-point
PAXI - the axis of the P-point
5.1.4 Position Type P-point (PTPOS)
A PTPOS allows a P-point to be defined by specifying a position expression PTCPOS and
using PTCD to specify the direction expression. A PTPOS has no member elements and
has the following attributes:
PTCPOS - the position expression
PTCD - the direction expression
PURP - the purpose of the P-point.
5.2 Structural Pointsets (PTSSET)
A PTSSET is a collection of P-line elements (PLINE). P-lines are used in the Catalogue by
Profiles and J oints. P-lines are used in the design process to position and orientate Sections
(derived from Profiles) and J oints.
12.0 2 5:4
Figure 5:1. D and 3D Views of a P-line
A P-line is the structural counterpart of a P-point. It is a line which runs the full length of a
Component parallel to its Z axis. Viewed in the XY plane, it appears as a point. This point is
its position. A P-line also has a direction. This is not the direction of the line itself (which is
always parallel to the Z axis of the Component), but a direction from the line in the XY plane.
The position and direction are defined in XY coordinates only. Figure 5:1.: D and 3D Views
of a P-line shows a two-dimensional view and a three-dimensional view of a P-line on the
top of a Section.
P-lines may be used in PARAGON to define the position and orientation of the 2D primitives
in a Structural Geomset which make up a Profile. They cannot be used to position and
orientate the 3D primitives which make up a J oint.
One of the P-lines in a Structural Pointset must be designated as the neutral axis p-line.
This is used in DESIGN for positioning and orientating the Component. (The neutral axis is
the line where there is no stress in bending, and about which the Component bends.) A P-
line is designated as the neutral axis by setting the neutral axis reference attribute
(NAREF) of the Structural Pointset to the name of the P-line.
A PLINE has no member elements and has the following attributes:
PKEY - the P-line identifier key
PX,PY - the X, Y coordinates of the P-line
PLAXI - the axis of the P-line, defining its direction
LEVEL - the drawing level range attribute
CLFLA- the centreline drawing flag attribute
DESC - a textual description of the Pline
PURP - the purpose of the Pline
PKEY is a word attribute which identifies the P-line. It is equivalent to the NUMB attribute of
a P-point. PLAXI is a direction, equivalent to the PAXI attribute of a P-point.
PKEY must be set as a word. PLAXI must be set as a direction - see Defining an Axis for
details. PX and PY may be set as values or in terms of parameters. The classes of
parameter which may be used depend on whether the P-line is used by a Profile or by a
J oint - see Parameters for details. Manipulating the Catalogue Database gives examples of
setting these attributes.
The settings of LEVEL, CLFLA and TUFLA and the use of the REPRESENTATION
command affect whether or not the P-line is drawn by PARAGON. LEVEL is a pair of
numbers specifying a range and CLFLA and TUFLA are set to TRUE or FALSE
(corresponding to on or off respectively). The way in which LEVEL, TUFLA and CLFLA
and the REPRESENTATION settings interact is discussed in P-point and P-line
Representation. (The settings of LEVEL, CLFLA and TUFLA also affect whether or not the
P-line is drawn in DESIGN.)
The primitives in the Geomsets also have LEVEL, CLFLA and TUFLA attributes, which
affect whether or not they are drawn in PARAGON and DESIGN.
Note: A P-line has its own set of axes, which are used in the design process (not in
PARAGON). See the DESIGN Reference Manual for details.
5.3 D Geomsets (GMSET)
A GMSET is a grouping of 3D primitive elements which are used to make up Piping
Components, J oints and Fittings. It specifies the dimensions, orientation and obstruction
geometry of each primitive. The Geomset defines the symbol that is drawn for a particular
Component by PARAGON (and DESIGN) and also defines the obstruction geometry of the
Component for use when checking for clashes. Each symbol is built up from a combination
of the following primitives:
SBOX - rectangular box
BOXI - boxing (used by HVAC and Ducting etc)
SCON - cone
LCYL - cylinder
SCYL - cylinder
SSLC - slope bottomed cylinder
SDIS - disc
SDSH - dish
SLINE - line
LINE - line
LPYR - pyramid
SCTO - circular torus
SRTO - rectangular torus
LSNO - snout
SSPH - sphere
TUBE - tubing
SEXT - user-defined extrusion
SREV - solid of revolution
GMSET has no attributes other than the standard ones. Each member element of a 3D
Geomset has the following attributes in addition to the standard ones:
LEVEL - the drawing level range attribute
CLFLA - the centreline drawing flag attribute
12.0 2 5:6
OBST - the obstruction attribute
DESC - a textual description of the Geomset
GTYP - the generic type of the item for which the Geomset is used
PURP - the purpose of the Geomset
The settings of LEVEL, CLFLA and TUFLA affect whether the primitive is drawn or not by
PARAGON (or DESIGN), as they do for P-lines. See Structural Pointsets (PTSSET) for
details.
OBST is a number which defines the obstruction level of the primitive for use by DESIGNs
clash checking facility:
OBST =0:
No obstruction. The primitive will not clash with anything (used for symbols and
negative volumes).
OBST =1:
Soft obstruction. Used for insulation, access volumes, penalty volumes, etc.
OBST =2:
Hard obstruction. DESIGNs clash checking facility will report hard interference with
any item having OBST 1 or 2.
The LEVEL, OBST, CLFLA and TUFLA attributes are common to all primitives. Each
primitive also has additional attributes depending on its shape; these are described in the
next section.
5.4 D Geomset Primitives
The following primitive elements are used by 3D Geomsets. They all have the standard
attributes and the common attributes LEVEL, CLFLA, TUFLA and OBST.
5.4.1 Box (SBOX)
SBOX has particular attributes as follows:
PXLE, PYLE, PZLE - box dimensions in X, Y, Z directions
PX, PY, PZ - box coordinates
Figure 5:2. SBOX Catalogue Primitive
5.4.2 Boxing (BOXI)
Components whose GTYPE attribute is TUBE can use BOXI elements to give, for example,
implied tube of rectangular cross-section. BOXI elements can be used for modelling ducting,
trunking and cable trays.
BOXI has the following particular attributes:
PXLE - cross-section X-direction length
PZLE - cross-section Z-direction length
PAXI - position and orientation of normal to centre of end face
TVISI - visibility of top face
BVISI - visibility of bottom face
Figure 5:3. BOXI Catalogue Primitive
When implied tube is drawn using BOXI elements, the Y axis of the implied BOXI is set to
the PLeave direction of the preceding component. The X axis of the BOXI is set to be
mutually orthogonal to the PLeave and the Z axis of the preceding component (which
usually corresponds to the X axis of the component). The Z axis of the BOXI is then derived
from its X and Y axes (and usually corresponds to the Z axis of the component).
A 3D Geomset may contain more than one BOXI element and corresponding P-points may
be offset in the X or Z directions.
Note: for Pipework Designers: If there is no preceding component (that is, if the implied
BOXI forms the Head of a Branch), the Y axis will be set to the Parrive of the
following component (that is, the first component in the Branch). If there are no
components, the BOXI will be set to the orientation of the Zone. (Since Pipe and
Branch elements have no coordinate system, this is the lowest level in the design
hierarchy from which an orientation can be derived.)
5.4.3 Cone (SCON)
SCON has particular attributes as follows:
PAXI - direction of axis of cone
PDIS - height of vertex above base
PDIA - diameter of base
12.0 2 5:8
Figure 5:4. Cone Catalogue Primitive
5.4.4 Cylinder (LCYL)
There are three types of cylinder primitive defined in different ways. LCYL is defined by the
distances from the origin to the two end faces. LCYL has particular attributes as follows:
PAXI - direction of axis of cylinder
PDIA - diameter of cylinder
PBDI - distance along axis to centre of bottom surface
PTDI - distance along axis to centre of top surface
Figure 5:5. Cylinder (LCYL) Catalogue Primitive
5.4.5 Cylinder (SCYL)
This type of cylinder primitive is defined by the distance to the bottom face from the origin
and the height. SCYL has particular attributes as follows:
PHEI - height of cylinder
PDIS - distance along axis to centre of nearest surface
Figure 5:6. Cylinder (SCYL) Catalogue Primitive
5.4.6 Slope-Bottomed Cylinder (SSLC)
This is similar to the SLCY available in the Design Data and has its main use in the
modelling of mitred bends. SSLC has the following particular attributes:
PHEI - height of cylinder
PXTS - inclination of top face to X-axis
PYTS - inclination of top face to Y-axis
PXBS - inclination of bottom face to X-axis
PYBS - inclination of bottom face to Y-axis
PDIS - distance from origin
12.0 2 5:10
Figure 5:7. Slope-Bottomed Cylinder (SSLC) Catalogue Primitive
5.4.7 Disc (SDIS)
The Disc primitive is a circular element of zero thickness. SDIS has particular attributes as
follows:
PAXI - direction of axis of disc
PDIS - distance along axis to centre of disc
PDIA - diameter of disc
Figure 5:8. Disc Catalogue Primitive
5.4.8 Dish (SDSH)
This is similar to the DISH available in the Design Data. It allows symbolic modelling of
control valves and closer modelling of other Components. SDSH has the following particular
attributes:
PAXI - direction of axis of dish
PDIS - distance along axis to centre of top surface
PDIA - diameter of dish base
PHEI - maximum height of dished surface above base
PRAD - corner radius
If PRAD=0 a spherical section dish is drawn, if PRAD>0 an ellipsoidal section dish is drawn.
Figure 5:9. Dish Catalogue Primitive
5.4.9 Line (LINE)
In addition to the three-dimensional primitive elements, 3D Geomsets may contain Line
(LINE). A LINE has one particular attribute:
PTS - a set of numbers (up to six) representing P-point numbers of the P-points in the
corresponding Pointset, which determine the course of the line.
The values held in PTS are set by the SETPoints command, followed by point
specifications in which each p-point identifier is preceded by P or T, e.g. P1 P2 T3 P4.
When the P-point is preceded by P it is treated in the same way as a point element (POINT)
in the Design Data; when preceded by a T it is treated in the same way as a tangent point
element (TANP) in the Design Data. (See DESIGN Reference Manual for further details).
5.4.10 Line (SLINE)
In addition to the three-dimensional primitive elements, an alternative to the LINE element is
the SLINE. This has two particular attributes:
PTSPOS - Start position expression
PTEPOS - End position expression
5.4.11 Pyramid (LPYR)
The main use of this element is in the creation of rectangular reducers for ducting etc. LPYR
has the particular attributes as follows:
12.0 2 5:12
PAAX - direction of axis normal to top face of pyramid (the A axis):
this is taken to be in the Z direction
PBAX, PCAX - the directions of the two axes perpendicular to the A axis and mutually
perpendicular to define the position of the B and C sides
PBTP, PCTP - length of top faces in B axis and C axis directions
PBBT, PCBT - length of bottom faces in B axis and C axis directions
PBOF, PCOF - top face offsets in B axis and C axis directions
PTDI - distance from origin to centre of top face along A axis
PBDI - distance from origin to centre of bottom face along A axis
Figure 5:10. Pyramid Catalogue Primitive
5.4.12 Circular Torus (SCTO)
The circular torus is only part of a torus; it is not permitted to subtend more than 180
degrees. It is circular in cross-section. SCTO has particular attributes as follows:
PAAX, PBAX - direction of axes normal to the end faces of the torus
PDIA - diameter of the cross-section of the torus.
Figure 5:11. Circular Torus Catalogue Primitive
5.4.13 Rectangular Torus (SRTO)
The rectangular torus is similar to the circular torus except that it is rectangular in cross-
section. SRTO has particular attributes as follows:
PAAX, PBAX - direction of axes normal to the end faces of the torus
PDIA - width of the cross-section of the torus
PHEI - height of the cross-section of the torus
Figure 5:12. Rectangular Torus Catalogue Primitive
5.4.14 Snout (LSNO)
The Snout primitive is a cylindrical element of varying diameter along its length. It may be
eccentric or concentric. LSNO has particular attributes as follows:
PAAX - direction of axis normal to top surface of snout (the A axis)
PBAX - offset direction
PTDI, PBDI - distance along A axis to top, bottom surfaces of snout
PTDM, PBDM - diameter of top, bottom surfaces of snout
POFF - the offset/eccentricity of the snout as measured in the PBAX direction
12.0 2 5:14
Figure 5:13. Snout Catalogue Primitive
The sizes of the top and bottom surfaces of the snout may be defined in terms of their radii
instead of their diameters.
PTRA, PBRA - radius of top, bottom surfaces of snout
5.4.15 Sphere (SSPH)
SSPH has particular attributes as follows:
PAXI - direction of axis on which centre of sphere lies
PDIS - distance along axis to centre of sphere
PDIA - diameter of sphere
Figure 5:14. Sphere Catalogue Primitive
5.4.16 Tube (TUBE)
Components whose GTYPE attribute is TUBE can use TUBE Geomset elements to give, for
example, implied tube of circular cross-section. TUBE has particular attributes as follows:
PDIAM - tube diameter
5.4.17 User-defined Extrusion (SEXT)
This primitive is generated by extruding a user-defined 2D shape, known as a Loop
(SLOO), whose outline is defined by a set of member elements called Vertices (SVER).
The lines joining adjacent SVERs form the edges of the SLOO. The extrusion distance is
defined by the height of the SEXT to give the final 3D volume.
In addition to the attributes defining its position, each SVER can have a radius which applies
a convex or concave fillet to the loop at that point.
SEXT has particular attributes as follows:
PX, PY, PZ - coordinates of origin of SLOO
PAAX, - directions of axes of SLOO
PBAX - (these will define coordinate system for SVERs)
PHEI - distance by which 2D SLOO is extruded to form 3D SEXT
SLOO has no special attributes.
SVER has particular attributes as follows:
PX, PY - coordinates of vertex
PRAD - fillet radius of loop at vertex position
Figure 5:15. User-defined Extrusion Catalogue Primitive
5.4.18 Solid of Revolution (SREV)
This primitive is generated by rotating a user-defined 2D shape, known as a Loop (SLOO),
whose outline is defined by a set of member elements called Vertices (SVER), through an
angle about an axis. The swept angle must be in the range -360 to +360 degrees, 360
degrees giving a solid which is axially symmetrical.
In addition to the attributes defining its position, each SVER can have a radius which applies
a convex or concave fillet to the loop at that point.
SREV has particular attributes as follows:
PX, PY, PZ - coordinates of origin of SLOO
PAAX, - directions of axes of SLOO
PBAX - (these will define coordinate system for SVERs)
PANGLE - angle through which 2D SLOO is rotated to form 3D SREV
12.0 2 5:16
SLOO has no special attributes.
SVER has particular attributes as follows:
PRAD - fillet radius of loop at vertex position
Figure 5:16. Solid of Revolution Catalogue Primitive
5.5 Negative 3D Geomsets (NGMSET) and Negative
Primitives
A NGMSET is a grouping of negative 3D primitive elements which are used to represent
holes or end preparations for structural items. It specifies the dimensions, orientation and
obstruction geometry of each negative primitive. The attributes of NGMSETs are the same
as those of their positive equivalents (see D Geomsets (GMSET) and D Geomset
Primitives).
The Negative Geomset defines the symbol that is drawn for a particular Component by
PARAGON (and DESIGN) and also defines the obstruction geometry of the Component for
use when checking for clashes.
Each symbol is built up from a combination of the following negative primitives:
NSBO - negative rectangular box
NBOX - negative boxing
NSCO - negative cone
NLCY - negative cylinder
NSCY - negative cylinder
NSSL - negative slope bottomed cylinder
NLPY - negative pyramid
NSCT - negative circular torus
NSRT - negative rectangular torus
NLSN - negative snout
NSSP - negative sphere
NTUB - negative tubing
NSEX - negative user-defined extrusion
NSRE - negative solid of revolution
NSRU - negative ruled surface
Negative Primitives have the same attributes as the corresponding positive primitives, with
the addition of the NAPP (Negative APPlies to) attribute, which controls whether the
negative primitive is removed from the item itself, or the attached or owning item. The
allowed values are:
1 - Default. See following table:
0 - Negative Primitive will not be removed from anything.
1 - Negative Primitive will be removed from Attached item
2 - Negative Primitive will be removed from Owner
4 - Negative Primitive will be removed from the item itself
7 - Negative Primitive will be removed from all items.
The positive values can be combined so that the hole will be created in more than one item.
For example, NAPP=6 means that the volume will be removed from the item itself and the
items owner.
The following table shows what Attached and Owner mean for items that can referenced
NGMSEs.
For example, if a SUBJ oint references a NGMSE which contains an NSBOX with NAPP=1,
the NSBOX will be removed from the Subjoints attached Section.
Item Remove from
PJ OInt Attached SCTN or GENSEC
SJ OInt Attached SCTN or GENSEC
SUBJ oint Attached SCTN or GENSEC
SCOJ oint Owning PANEl
PFITting Owning PANEl
COFItting Owning PANEl
FITTing Owning SCTN
FIXIng Owning GENSEC
Item Attached Owner
PJ OInt Attached SCTN or GENSEC -
SJ OInt Attached SCTN or GENSEC Owning SCTN or GENSEC
SUBJ oint - Owning PCOJ /SCOJ
SCOJ oint - Owning SCTN or GENSEC
PFITting - Owning PANEl
COFItting - Owning PANEl
FITTing - Owning SCTN
FIXIng - Owning GENSEC
12.0 2 5:18
5.6 Structural Geomsets (GMSSET)
A GMSSET is a grouping of 2D primitive elements used to make up structural Profiles. It
specifies the dimensions, orientation and obstruction geometry of each primitive. The
Geomset defines the symbol that is drawn for a particular Component by PARAGON (and
DESIGN) and also defines the obstruction geometry of the Component for use when clash
checking. Each symbol is built up from a combination of the following three types of
primitive:
SREC - rectangle
SANN - annulus
SPRO - user-defined profile
Like the member elements of a 3D Geomset, each member element of a Structural
Geomset has LEVEL, CLFLA, TUFLA and OBST attributes.
Note: For correct clash detection, the maximum number of primitives with OBST set to 1 or
2 in any GMSSET is 20; the order of these in the members list is not important. See
the DESIGN Reference Manual for details of the best way of setting up Component
data so as to minimise processing time for clash detection.
The primitives have additional attributes as described in the next section.
5.7 Structural Geomset Primitives
The following primitive elements are used by Structural Geomsets. They all have the
standard attributes and the common attributes LEVEL, CLFLA, TUFLA and OBST. The
additional particular attributes of each element are as described below.
Note that each 2D primitive has effectively two types of positional attributes which allow its
geometry to be changed progressively as it is extruded in space to create a 3D design
element (such as a structural SCTN or GENSEC element). The P... attributes define the
geometry at the Start of an extruded section, while the D... attributes define the change in
that geometry between the Start and End of the extruded section.
5.7.1 Structural Rectangle (SREC)
SREC has particular attributes as follows:
PXLE, PYLE - rectangle dimensions in X, Y directions
DXLE, DYLE - difference in rectangle dimensions in X, Y directions for tapered sections
PX, PY - coordinates of centre of rectangle
DX, Dy - offset of coordinates of centre of rectangle between ends of section
PLAXI - direction of Y axis of rectangle
Figure 5:17. SREC Catalogue Primitive
5.7.2 Structural Annulus (SANN)
SANN has particular attributes as follows:
PX, PY - coordinates of centre of annulus
DX, DY - offset of coordinates of centre of annulus between ends of section
PRAD - external radius
DRAD - change of external radius between ends of section
PWID - width of annulus
DWID - change of width between ends of section
PANG - angle subtended by annulus
PLAXI - start angle
Note: PANG must be in the range -180_ to +180_. Positive angles are anticlockwise when
the primitive is viewed in the -Z direction.
12.0 2 5:20
Figure 5:18. SANN Catalogue Primitive
5.7.3 Structural Profile (SPRO)
This element represents a user-defined 2D shape whose outline is defined by a set of
member elements called Structural Profile Vertices (SPVE). The lines joining adjacent
SPVEs form the edges of the SPRO.
In addition to the attributes defining its position, each SPVE can have a radius which applies
a convex or concave fillet to the profile at that point.
SPRO has particular attributes as follows:
PLAXI - direction of Y axis of profile (this defines coordinate system for SPVEs)
SPVE has particular attributes as follows:
DX, DY - offset of coordinates between start and end of a tapered section
PRAD - fillet radius of profile at vertex position
DRAD - change of fillet radius of profile at vertex position between ends of section
Figure 5:19. SPRO and SPVE Catalogue Primitives
12.0 2 5:22
Manipulating the Catalogue Database
6 Manipulating the Catalogue Database
This chapter describes how to create and manipulate the member elements of the PDMS
Catalogue database.
6.1 Basic Element Operation Commands
6.1.1 Querying:
6.1.2 Creation, deletion etc:
6.1.3 Implicit element referencing:
QUERY e.g. QUERY ATTRIBUTES
NEW e.g. NEW SECTION
DELETE e.g. DELETE SREC
REORDER e.g. REORDER 5 BEFORE 3
COPY e.g. COPY /VALVES2-1
RENAME e.g. RENAME /UEANGLE80 /UEANGLE100
INCLUDE e.g. INCLUDE SCOM 6 OF /FLAN300 BEFORE 2
OLD
END
SAME
CE
OWNER
GOTO e.g. GOTO PTREF
12.0 2 6:2
6.1.4 List position changing:
6.1.5 Standard attribute setting
These commands are those which are common to all constructor modules of PDMS and
some are used in this chapter without further explanation. However, the element types
which the above commands operate on relate to the Catalogue database rather than the
Design database (so, for example, NEXT SITE is meaningless in PARAGON).
6.2 Creating Catalogues, Sections and Catalogue
Components
Catalogues and Sections are created using the NEW command. You would normally also
specify names by which you can recognise and refer to the elements created. For example:
NEWCATA / ANSI - CATALOGUE
will create a Catalogue with the name /ANSI-CATALOGUE in the Catalogue database.
NEWSECT / FLANGES
NEWSTSEC / PROFI LES
will create a Piping Section with the name /FLANGES and a Structural Section with the
name /PROFILES. Similarly,
NEWCATEG / ANSI - B16. 5- CLASS- 300- BLI ND- FLANGES
NEWSTCAT / UNI VERSAL- BEAM
will create a Piping Category and a Structural Category with the names given.
A Catalogue Component is represented by one of the Component elements SCOM, SPRF,
SJ OI, SFIT (see Catalogue Components).
NEWSCOM
will create a Piping Component with unspecified component parameters, the values of
which may be set later.
FIRST (Can be just command word by itself or followed by element
LAST type, for example FIRST LCYL)
NEXT
PREVIOUS number list position number, e.g. 5
NAME
UNNAME
LOCK
UNLOCK
If the Component is to be named, this can be done at the same time; for example,
NEWSFI T / EKAA2VEE
The attributes of the Component (see Catalogue Components) are set simply by following
the attribute with the word, name or value(s) to be assigned to it. For example:
NEWSCOM
GTYPE ELBO
PTREF / PSE1
GMREF / GSE1
PARAM 20 19. 1 12. 7 37. 1 BWD
The above commands create a Piping Component, of generic type ELBO, which is defined
by 3D Pointset /PSE1 and 3D Geomset /GSE1, and which has the five component
parameters shown. The Pointset and Geomset which are referred to by name must already
exist; they would have been created by the commands
NEWPTSET / PSE1
NEWGMSET / GSE1
All five component parameters have been given values using a single command line, but
they can be given values individually by using commands such as
PARAM[ 1] 20
PARAM{2] 19
. . .
et c.
Note: You can only use the PARAM[number] syntax to change the value of a parameter
which has already been set.
This facility allows component parameter definitions to be edited. (Caution: If you delete a
COMP which is referred to by a SPCO - via the CATREF attribute of a design component -
this reference will be lost.). The use of component parameters and the other classes of
parameter is discussed and illustrated in the next section.
Note: If you give a PARAM command with, say, four values as a single command line,
PARAGON sets the values of the first four component parameters and deletes all the
rest.
You may define default values which PARAGON will use if you are working with a
Component whose component parameters have not been set up. See Parameters for
details.
The attributes of a Component may be queried by a
QUERY ATTRI BUTES
command, or may be queried individually by name. Component parameters can be queried
as a set by using the command
QUERY PARAMETERS
or singly by using commands such as
QUERY PARAMETER[ 1]
QUERY PARAMETER[ 2]
et c.
12.0 2 6:4
6.3 Using Parameters
6.3.1 Introduction
Piping Components, Profiles and Fittings each use one type of Pointset and one type of
Geomset. J oints use both types of Pointset and one type of Geomset. The attributes of
Pointsets and Geomsets may be defined in terms of parameters, set either explicitly or as
real expressions (which may themselves incorporate the current settings of other
parameters). (The classes of parameter which may be used depend on the class of
Component - see Parameters for details.)
For example, the bore of a P-point could be defined by entering
PBORE ( PARAM[ 1] )
This means that the value assigned to the bore of the P-point is the value of the first
component parameter.
The Y dimension of a box in a 3D Geomset used by a J oint could be defined as the
expression
PYLEN ( APARAM[ 2] + 3)
This means that the Y dimension of the box is to be given a value in the design process,
taken from the Section to which the J oint is attached. The value of the Y dimension of the
box is the value of the second component parameter of the attached Profile plus 3 mm.
The use of parameters makes it possible to use the same Pointsets and Geomsets for large
numbers of catalogue items. For example, there may be families of tees, valves, I-beam
profiles etc., each family containing items which are geometrically similar. In this way, the
Catalogue size and the effort needed to prepare input data are minimised.
Examples of the parameterisation of typical Components are given later in this chapter.
The values assigned to parameters, the uses to which they are put, and the number of
parameters used, are arbitrary, depending only on the skill and experience of the user,
except in the special case of a Piping Component which represents implied tubing (GTYPE
attribute set to TUBE) and which has no Geomset. In this case, component parameter 2
must be the outside diameter. If the tube is to be insulated, insulation parameter 1 must be
twice the thickness of the insulation.
Note: on the use of Insulation Parameters: Insulation parameters may be used in two
ways. They may be used in an additive manner to increase the diameter or length of
a primitive or, if there is a significant change in the geometry from the uninsulated to
the insulated form, they may be used to define a new primitive. Where there is no
insulation, the insulation parameters will be zero, yielding a primitive of zero diameter
(but probably non-zero length).
6.3.2 Expressions Using Parameters
Any expression which includes parameters and which evaluates to a real result may be built
into definitions of Pointsets and Geomsets. For example:
PDI A ( 4. 5 * PARA[ 2] )
PDI S ( - PARA[ 2] )
PBOR ( PARA[ 7] + I PARA[ 1] )
PHEI ( PARA[ 2] + 50)
PDI S ( APARA[ 2] - PARA[ 7] )
PDI A ( - ( PARA[ 1] - PARA[ 5] ) )
PX ( 2 * OPARA[ 3] )
PTDI S ( PARA[ 2] * DESP[ 5] )
PHEI ( PARA[ 4] / ODESP[ 1] )
PZ ( 5 * ( ADESP[ 3] * PARA[ 9] )
PDI S ( 3. 1 * ( PARA[ 1] + HEI G) )
PHEI ( PARA[ 1] * TAN ( ANGL / 2) )
(For the full range of expression syntax available, see the Plant Design Software
Customisation Guide.)
6.4 Examples of Parameterisation
Example 1 A Slip-On Flange
Figure 6:1. Example of Parameterisation for a Slip-On Flange
A slip-on flange can be parameterised using five component parameters, as shown in
Figure 6:1.: Example of Parameterisation for a Slip-On Flange.
PARAM 1 - PBORE
PARAM 2 - Outside Diameter
PARAM 3 - Thickness
PARAM 4 - Connection Type at P1
PARAM 5 - Connection Type at P2
12.0 2 6:6
Example 2 A Reducing Tee
Figure 6:2. Example of Parameterisation for a Reducing Tee
A reducing tee might be parameterised using 12 component parameters, as shown in Figure
6:2.: Example of Parameterisation for a Reducing Tee.
PARAM 1 - Nominal bore of main run (PBOR1)
PARAM 2 - Outside diameter of main run
PARAM 3 - Nominal bore of branch (PBOR3)
PARAM 4 - Outside diameter of branch
PARAM 5 - Half overall length of main run
PARAM 6 - Standout length of branch run
PARAM 7 - Connection type of main run
PARAM 8 - Connection type of branch run
PARAM 9 - Flange diameter of main run
PARAM 10 - Flange thickness of main run
PARAM 11 - Flange diameter of branch run
PARAM 12 - Flange thickness of branch run
Other families of tees could be defined as follows:
Equal and reducing welded tees using parameters 1-8
Equal and reducing flanged tees using all the parameters
Example 3 A Universal Beam Profile
Figure 6:3. Example of Parameterisation for a Universal Beam Profile
A Universal Beam Profile might be parameterised using four component parameters, as
shown in Figure 6:3.: Example of Parameterisation for a Universal Beam Profile.
PARAM 1 - Overall height of Profile
PARAM 2 - Flange width
PARAM 3 - Web thickness
PARAM 4 - Flange thickness
12.0 2 6:8
Example 4 An Angle Joint
Figure 6:4. Example of Parameterisation for an Angle Joint
An Angle J oint might be parameterised using three component parameters and two
attached parameters, as shown in Figure 6:4.: Example of Parameterisation for an Angle
Joint.
PARAM 1 - Overall height of angle leg
PARAM 2 - Overall length of angle foot
PARAM 3 - Thickness of leg and foot
APARA 1 - Height of profile of attached Section
APARA 2 - Width of flange of attached Section
6.5 Constructing 3D Pointsets
A 3D Pointset defines the connection information of a Piping Component, J oint or Fitting as
explained in Component Design. For the three types of P-point elements which may be
contained in a 3D Pointset, you must define the following attributes:
6.5.1 PTAXI
A P-point number (NUMB)
An axis direction (PAXI) (parallel to X, Y, Z or in the XY, YZ or ZX plane)
A distance along the specified axis (PDIS)
If the Pointset is used by a Piping Component, you may optionally define the attributes:
Connection type (PCON)
Bore (PBOR)
P-point symbol key (PSKEY)
(see Defining a Direction)
PCON and PBOR are meaningless if the Pointset is used by a J oint or Fitting.
Figure 6:5. Example of three Axial P-Points
6.5.2 PTCAR
An axis direction (PTCDIR) (in any plane)
An explicit position (PX, PY, PZ) (explicit coordinates)
Bore (PBOR)
P-point symbol key (PSKEY)
(see Defining a Direction)
12.0 2 6:10
Figure 6:6. Example of two Cartesian P-Points
6.5.3 PTMIX
An axis direction (PAXI) (parallel to X, Y, Z or in the XY, YZ or ZX plane)
An explicit position (PX, PY, PZ) (explicit coordinates)
Bore (PBOR)
P-point symbol key (PSKEY) (see Defining a Direction)
Figure 6:7. Example of two Mixed P-Points
6.5.4 Example of Defining a 3D Pointset
A suitable 3D Pointset for the reducing tee shown in Figure 6:2.: Example of
Parameterisation for a Reducing Tee would be created as follows:
Notice how all the P-point attributes may be defined on one line. The last P-point (P3) could
alternatively be defined as a Cartesian P-point:
NEW PTSET /RTPTSE Create new 3D Pointset
NEW PTAX Create axial P-point element
NUMBER 1 P1
PAXI -Y Direction of P1 along negative Y axis
PDIS (PARA[5]) Distance along axis from P0 =half overall length
PCON (PARA[7]) Connection type at P1
PBOR (PARA[1]) Nominal bore at P1
NEW PTAX
NUM 2 PAXI Y PDIS (PARA[5]) PCON (PARA[7]) PBOR (PARA[1])
NEW PTAX
NUM 3 PAXI X PDIS (PARA[6]) PCON (PARA[8]) PBOR (PARA[3])
NEW PTCAR
NUM 3 PCON (PARA[8]) PBOR (PARA[3])
12.0 2 6:12
Further examples of the construction of typical 3D Pointsets are given in Appendix C.
Reference information concerning the setting up of the P-point attributes is given in the
following subsections.
6.5.5 Defining an Axis
The PAXI attribute of a P-point can be defined in one of two ways:
by a direction letter, e.g. PAXI Z
by an angle in the XY plane (see below). You can specify the angle as
a number
DDANGLE
a parameter
TWICE a parameter
The classes of parameter which you can use depend on the class of the Component which
uses the P-point - see Parameters for details.
If you do not define the axis, PAXI Y is assumed.
Figure 6:8. P-point Axis Definition
PX (PARA[6]) PY 0 PZ 0
PTCDIR X
6.5.6 Defining a Distance
Distance in a PTAXI element is defined by the PDISTANCE keyword (minimum abbreviation
PDIS) followed by a value or a parameter function. For example:
If you do not define the distance, a value of zero is assumed.
For the reducing tee shown in Figure 6:2.: Example of Parameterisation for a Reducing Tee,
the position of P-point 3 could be defined by the commands:
PAXI X
PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] )
since PARAM 2 is the dimension called height.
6.5.7 Defining an Explicit Position
Position in a PTCAR element and a PTMIX element is defined by the PX, PY and PZ
keywords, each followed by a value or a parameter function. For example:
If you do not define a coordinate, a value of zero is assumed.
6.5.8 Defining a Direction
Direction in a PTCAR element is defined by the PTCDIRECTION keyword (minimum
abbreviation PTCDIR), followed by the direction specified in terms of the X, Y, Z axes and
rotations towards those axes. For example:
For other examples, see Figure 6:6.: Example of two Cartesian P-Points. Note that any one,
any two, or all three of X, Y, Z may be present in the PTCDIR command line, in any order.
The rotation value may be positive, negative or absent altogether (i.e. zero). If you do not
define the direction, DIR Y is assumed.
6.5.9 Defining Connection, Bore and Number
These three attributes are common to all three types of P-point elements, and are set by the
PBORE, PCONNECTION and NUMBER (minimum abbreviations PBOR, PCON, NUM)
PDI S 100 sets P-point position to 100 units along defined axis
PDI S ( PARAM[ 1] sets P-point position to (value of first component parameter)
units along defined axis
PX 100 sets P-point X coordinate to 100
PY (0.5 * APARA[3]) sets Y coordinate to (0.5 times value of third attached
parameter) units
PZ (PARA[2] * SIN (ANGLE / 2)) sets Z coordinate to (second component parameter
times sine of half design angle) units
PTCDIR X45Y direction is along the X axis, rotated 45 degrees towards
the Y axis
PTCDIR X(ANGL / 2)Y45U includes an expression for the Y component
12.0 2 6:14
commands respectively. PBOR and PCON may be set as parameter functions as well as
words. Examples:
PBORE ( 0. 5 * PARAM[ 2] )
PCONN BWD
PCONN ( PARAM[ 7] )
NUMBER 3
If you do not define the bore or the P-point number, a value of zero is assumed.
6.5.10 Controlling the Appearance
How a P-point is drawn depends on the REPRESENTATION settings. This is discussed in
P-point and P-line Representation.
6.5.11 Specifying Pipe End Conditions for use by ISODRAFT
The symbol used by ISODRAFT to represent a particular piping component on an isometric
drawing is determined by the symbol key (SKEY attribute setting) for that component. (See
the ISODRAFT Reference Manual for a full explanation of this concept.)
By default, each SKEY has associated with it a standard end condition (showing the pipe
connection type) which applies to each of the components connection points. The end
condition for any individual connection point may be modified, if required, by setting the
PSKEY attribute of the corresponding P-point to a PDMS word chosen from the following:
The effect of setting PSKEY to one of these words for a P-point of type PTAXI, PTCAR or
PTMIX is that ISODRAFT will then add the symbolic representation of the specified end
condition to the symbol derived from the corresponding SKEY when it plots an isometric
drawing showing the component. The default setting for PSKEY is always NULL, which
means that ISODRAFT plots only the standard end conditions for the symbol.
Note that the effect is additive, so that ISODRAFT superimposes any user-specified end
condition (derived from a non-Null PSKEY setting) on top of any end condition which forms
part of the standard symbol associated with the SKEY. The use of the PSKEY facility is,
therefore, applicable mainly to components which do not have other end conditions already
defined, particularly those associated with user-defined symbols (as detailed in the
ISODRAFT Reference Manual).
BW Butt Weld
CP Compression
FL Flange
SC Screwed
SW Socket Weld
PL Plain
6.6 Constructing Structural Pointsets
A Structural Pointset defines the connection information of a Profile or J oint as explained in
Structural Pointsets (PTSSET). A Structural Pointset has a neutral axis reference attribute
in addition to the standard attributes, and contains P-lines.
6.6.1 Example of Defining a Structural Pointset
A suitable Structural Pointset for the Profile shown in Figure 6:3.: Example of
Parameterisation for a Universal Beam Profile would be created as follows:
Notice how all the P-line attributes may be defined on one line. Reference information
concerning the setting up of the P-line attributes is given in Defining an Axis to Controlling
the Appearance.
6.6.2 The Neutral Axis Reference
The neutral axis reference identifies a P-line in the Structural Pointset. It is set by the
NAREF command. The attribute is usually set to the name of the P-line, but may be set to
the P-lines number in the member list of the Pointset. For example:
If you do not set NAREF, DESIGN will make an assumption about where the neutral axis is.
You are strongly recommended to set the neutral axis reference in the Catalogue.
NEW PTSSET /UBPTSE Create new Structural Pointset
NEW PLIN /UB-TOS Create P-line element for top of steel
PKEY TOS Define key
PLAXI Y Direction of P-line along positive Y axis
PY (0.5 * PARA[1]) Distance in Y direction from component origin =half overall
height. (There is no need to set PX, because it is zero.)
CLFLA TRUE Display P-line in centreline representation
TUFLA FALSE but not in tube representation
NEW PLIN /UB-BOS Create new P-line element for bottom of steel
PKEY BOS PLAXI -Y PY (-0.5 * PARA[1]) CLFLA TRUE TUFLA FALSE
NEW PLIN /UB-NA - Create new P-line element for neutral axis
PKEY NAXI PLAXI Y CLFLA TRUE TUFLA FALSE
END Make the Structural Pointset the current element
NAREF /UB-NA Define neutral axis reference
NAREF /UB-NA Sets neutral axis reference to the P-line called /UB-NA
NAREF 3 Sets neutral axis reference to the third P-line of the tructural
Pointset
12.0 2 6:16
DESIGN will use as the neutral axis the first P-line in the Structural Pointset which has a
PKEY value of NA, if any. Failing that, it will choose the first P-line with a PKEY value of
NAXI, and failing that, it will choose the first P-line with a PKEY value of ZAXI. If there are no
P-lines with a PKEY value of NA or NAXI or ZAXI, DESIGN will assume that the neutral axis
of the Component lies at the component origin and has a direction along the positive Y axis.
Figure 6:9. P-line Axis Definition
6.6.3 Defining an Axis
The PLAXI attribute of a P-line can be defined in one of two ways:
by a direction letter, e.g. PLAXI Y
by an angle in the XY plane (see below). You can specify the angle as
a numbe
DDANGLE
a parameter
TWICE a parameter
The classes of parameter which you can use depend on the class of the Component
which uses the P point - see Parameters for details.
If you do not define the axis, PLAXI Y is assumed.
6.6.4 Defining a Position
Position in a P-line element is defined by the PX and PY keywords, each followed by a value
or a parameter function. For example:
If you do not define a coordinate, a value of zero is assumed.
6.6.5 Defining a Key
A P-line is identified by its key in the same way as a P-point is identified by its number. The
key is defined by the PKEY keyword followed by a word. For example:
6.6.6 Controlling the Appearance
Whether a P-line is drawn or not depends on the settings of its LEVEL, TUFLA and CLFLA
attributes, and the REPRESENTATION settings. How a P-line is drawn also depends on the
REPRESENTATION settings. See P-point and P-line Representation for details.
6.7 Constructing 3D Geomsets
A 3D Geomset is a grouping of the primitive elements which make up a Piping Component,
J oint or Fitting. It specifies the dimensions, orientation and obstruction geometry of each
primitive. The Geomset defines what is drawn for a particular Component by PARAGON
(and other PDMS modules), and also defines the obstruction geometry of the Component
for use when clash checking. Each Component is built up from a combination of three-
dimensional primitives, as listed in D Geomsets (GMSET).
Creating a Geomset consists of creating the relevant member primitives and setting the
attributes for each primitive. For each primitive the OBST attribute must be set, whilst for a
primitive that is required to be drawn the LEVEL, TUFLA and CLFLA attributes must also be
set. (See Component Design and Representation and the DESIGN Reference Manual for
details of these attributes.) 3D Geomset elements and their attributes are listed in D
Geomset Primitives.
Note: Only the first 20 primitives in a Geomset with OBST values of 1 or 2 are considered
by DESIGNs clash checking facility.
PX 50 sets P-line X coordinate to 50
PY (0.5 * DESPAR[2]) sets P-line Y coordinate to 0.5 * (value of second design
parameter) units
PKEY TOS sets P-line key to TOS
PKEY may be set to any desired word value. Typical values are:
TOS Top of steel, for a P-line at the top of the Profile
BOS Bottom of steel, for a P-line at the bottom of the Profile
NA, NAXI or ZAXI Neutral axis P-line
12.0 2 6:18
By using the TUFLA and CLFLA flags, you can create two different drawings of a
Component, a double-line representation (tube) and a single-line stick representation
(centreline).
To define the tube representation for the tee shown in Figure 6:2.: Example of
Parameterisation for a Reducing Tee (with clash geometry) the commands shown below
could be used. (The P-points in the following examples relate to the Pointset defined in
PTAXI.)
To define the centreline representation for the tee (with welded joints), the following
commands could be used. Figure 6:10.: Centreline Representation of a Reducing Tee
shows the symbol produced. The illustration is drawn with REPRESENTATION PPOINTS
ON LENGTH 0 NUMBERS ON. The P-points are thus displayed as dots, but they cannot be
seen because they lie on the displayed LINEs.
NEW GMSET /RTGMSE Create new 3D Geomset
NEW SCYL Create cylinder primitive
PAXI -Y Direction of axis on which SCYL origin lies
PDIS (PARA[5]) Distance of SCYL origin from tee origin =half overall length
PDIA (PARA[2]) Outside diameter of main run
PHEI (-2 * PARA[5]) Height of SCYL
OBST 2 Set obstruction value as hard
TUFL TRUE CLFL FALSE Set drawing flags
NEW SCYL
PAXI X
PDIS 0
PHEI (PARA[6])
PDIA (PARA[4])
OBST 2
TUFL TRUE CLFL FALSE
Figure 6:10. Centreline Representation of a Reducing Tee
NEW SSPH Create sphere primitive (to represent weld)
PAXI -Y Direction of axis on which sphere origin lies
PDIS (PARA[5]) Distance of sphere origin from tee origin =half overall length
PDIA (0.1 * PARA[1]) Sphere diameter relative to bore size
OBST 0 Clash checking to ignore item
TUFLA FALSE CLFL
TRUE
Set drawing flags
NEW SSPH
PAXI P2 Set axis direction and origin in terms of P-point 2
PDIS 0 PAXI P2 PDIS 0 is equivalent to PAXI Y PDIS (PARA[5]))
PDIA (0.1 * PARA[1])
OBST 0
CLFL TRUE
NEW SSPH
PAXI P3 PDIS 0 PDIA
(0.1 * PARA[3])
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE
NEW LINE P3 P0 Define line elements
12.0 2 6:20
Note how a P-point has been used to define an axis direction and origin for a primitive - see
the Reference Section at the end of this chapter for details.
To put the flanges on the tee the first two representations (as given above) would remain the
same but the centreline representation would not need the SSPH elements (which
represent the welds). The latter are replaced by using the following commands to represent
the flanged connections:
NEWSCYL PAXI P1 PHEI ( - PARA[ 10] ) PDI A ( PARA[ 9] )
PDI S 0 OBST 2 CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE
NEWSCYL COPY PREV PAXI P2
NEWLCYL PAXI P3 PTDI 0 PBDI ( - PAR[ 12] ) PDI A ( PAR[ 11] )
OBST 2 CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE
6.8 Constructing Structural Geomsets
A Structural Geomset is a grouping of the 2D primitive elements which make up a Profile.
Like the 3D Geomset, it specifies the dimensions, orientation and obstruction geometry of
each primitive. It also defines the symbol that is drawn for a particular Component and the
obstruction geometry of the Component. The Profile is built up from a combination of
Structural Rectangles (SREC) and Structural Annuli (SANN), as described in Structural
Geomsets (GMSSET). Structural Geomset elements and their attributes are listed in
Structural Geomset Primitives.
To define the tube representation for the Profile shown in Figure 6:3.: Example of
Parameterisation for a Universal Beam Profile, the commands shown below could be used.
A simplified clash geometry for the Profile is specified by defining a bounding box for the
Profile with hard obstruction and giving the primitives of the Profile itself no obstruction.
The P-lines used are those defined in Example of Defining a Structural Pointset.
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE
DIAM 1
NEW LINE P1 P2
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE
DIAM 1
NEW GMSSET /UBGMSS Create new 2D Geomset
NEW SRECT Create rectangle primitive for web
PXLE (PARA[1]) Web thickness
PYLE (PARA[1] - 2 * PARA[4]) Web length
(PX and PY are zero, so there is no need to set
them)
PLAXI Y Direction of axis of rectangle
OBST 0 Set obstruction value as none
NEW SRECT Create rectangle primitive for upper flange
A P-line may be used to define an axis direction and position for a primitive. The example
below shows how the upper flange could be positioned and orientated using a P-line. See
the Reference Section at the end of this chapter for details.
6.9 Reference Section
6.9.1 Parameter-Controlled Attributes
The following attributes of P-points, P-lines and Geomset primitives may be set equal to
parameters or functions of parameters (as well as to constant values):
PDI St ance PBDI st ance PTDI st ance
PBBT PBTP PCBT PCTP
PDI Amet er PBDMet er PTDMet er
PRADi us PBRAdi us PTRAdi us PWI Dt h PANGl e
POFFset PBOFf set PCOFf set
PX PXLEngt h PY PYLEngt h PZ PZLEngt h
PBORe PCONnect PHEI ght
PXLE (PARA[2]) PYLE (PARA[4]) Flange length and thickness
PY (0.5 * (PARA[1] - PARA[4])) Position of rectangle origin
PLAXI Y Direction of axis of rectangle
OBST 0 Set obstruction value as none
NEW SRECT Create rectangle primitive for lower flange
PXLE (PARA[2]) PYLE (PARA[4])
PY (-0.5 * (PARA[1] - PARA[4]))
PLAXI Y
TUFL TRUE CLFL FALSE
OBST 0
NEW SRECT Create rectangle which bounds the Profile
PXLE (PARA[2]) PYLE (PARA[1])
PLAXI Y
TUFL FALSE CLFL FALSE Set both drawing flags off
OBST 2 Set obstruction value as hard
PLAXI TOS Set axis direction and origin in terms of P-line TOS
PY (-0.5 * PARA[4]) Position of rectangle origin relative to position of P-line
12.0 2 6:22
PXTShear PYTShear PXBShear PYBShear
6.9.2 Axial Attributes
Axial attributes of both 3D and 2D primitives define a position and a direction. An axial
attribute of a 3D primitive may be specified as a direction in one, two or three dimensions or
as a P-point. Similarly, the axial attribute of a 2D primitive may be specified as a direction in
one or two dimensions or as a P-line.
If an axial attribute of a 3D primitive is specified as a P-point, the direction of the axis is
taken to be the direction of the P-point, and the origin of the axis to be the position of the P-
point. If the axial attribute is specified as a direction, the origin of the axis is taken to be the
component origin, i.e. the position of P-point 0.
Examples:
Syntax:
>- - +- PAXI s - - .
| |
| - PAAXi s - |
| |
| - PBAXi s - |
| |
- PCAXi s - +- sign - .
| |
- - - - - - - - +- P - number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
- <axi s> - +- value - - - - - . |
| | |
| - <expr es> - - +- sign - . |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - - +- <axi s> - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
where <axis>is
>- - +- - X - - .
| |
| - - Y - - |
| |
- - Z - - +- - >
If the axial attribute of a 2D primitive is specified as a P-line, the direction of the axis is taken
to be the direction of the P-line, and the origin of the axis to be the position of the P-line. If
the axial attribute is specified as a direction or direction expression, the origin of the axis is
taken to be the component origin.
PAAX -P2 sets PAAX to be opposite the direction of P-point 2 with its origin
at the position of the P-point
PBAX X34-Y sets PBAX to the given direction from the component origin
PCAX X45Y30Z sets PCAX to the given direction from the component origin
PAXI X DDANG Z takes the Design DDANGLE and calculates the direction
accordingly
Examples:
Syntax:
>- PLAXi s - +- sign - .
| |
- - - - - - - - +- PLI Ne - <pl key> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
- <axi s> - +- value - - - - - . |
| | |
| - <expr es> - +- sign - . |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - - +- <axi s> - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
where <axis>is
>- - +- - X - - .
| |
- - Y - - +- - >
and <plkey>is the PKEY attribute of the P-line.
PLAX PLIN NAXI sets PLAX to be the direction of the P-line whose PKEY attribute is
NAXI; the origin of the axis is at the position of the P-line
PLAX X60-Y sets PLAX to the given direction from the component origin
12.0 2 6:24
Other Uses of PARAGON
7 Other Uses of PARAGON
PARAGON is used to set up:
Detailing Text and Material Text
Connection Tables and Bolt Tables
Unit Types
General Text
User-defined Nominal Dimensions.
7.1 Detailing Text
Detailing Text (SDTE) elements contain descriptive text relating to a Component, which is
used during the construction of drawings, reports, take-off sheets etc. An SDTE element
exists at the same level in the Catalogue database hierarchy as a Component element (i.e.
it is a member of a Section or Category) and is referred to from SPCOM elements in the
Specification.
An SDTE element (which will usually be named) is created simply by typing, for example:
NEWSDTE / C/ T1
The text itself exists as an attribute of the SDTE element; namely one of the attributes
RTEX, STEX or TTEX. The text is input simply by typing the attribute name followed by the
text itself in quotes; for example:
STEX 21DD- J J OOA2 12. 31
The choice of attribute name depends on the PDMS module which is to use the related text.
STEX and TTEX are used primarily by the detailing interface modules, and the attribute to
be used will be specified from that module. The format of the text depends on the detailing
module in use - see the appropriate Reference Guide for details.
RTEX is used by ISODRAFT, which also uses another SDTE attribute, SKEY. SKEY is a
four-character code which represents a geometric description of the associated Component
type. RTEX and SKEY must be set in order for ISODRAFT to work correctly. A typical pair of
commands would be:
RTEX COUPLI NG - SOCKET WELD 3000LB
SKEY COSW
(The SKEY codes are fixed for a given element type - see the ISODRAFT Reference Guide
for a list.)
12.0 2 7:2
7.2 Material Text
Material Text (SMTE) elements contain descriptive text describing the material(s) from
which the physical component is constructed, and is used during the construction of
drawings, reports, take-off sheets etc. An SMTE element exists at the same level in the
Catalogue database hierarchy as a Component element (i.e. it is a member of a Section or
Category) and is referred to from SPCOM elements in the Specification.
An SMTE element (which will usually be named) is created simply by typing, for example:
NEWSMTE / 5L- S- 80
The text itself exists as an attribute of the SMTE element; namely one of the attributes
XTEX, YTEX or ZTEX. The text is input simply by typing the attribute name followed by the
text itself in quotes, for example:
XTEX SCM. 80 API 5L GR. B SMLC
The choice of attribute name depends on the PDMS module which is to use the related text,
the attribute to be used being specified from that module. XTEX is used by ISODRAFT.
7.3 Connection Compatibility Tables
The Connection Compatibility Table (element name CCTA) holds a list of all the compatible
connection types for Piping Components in a set project. A CCTA is an administrative
element which exists at the same level as CATA in the hierarchy. A CCTA has Connection
Compatibility (COCO) elements as its members, each of which has a pair of coded
connection types stored as its CTYPE attribute. These connection types are those referred
to in the PCON attribute of a Piping Components P-points.
The commands below give an example of the setting up of a typical connection table.
Note: That ISODRAFT uses the connection codes to derive bolting requirements, and so
the connection codes used must conform to certain standards - see Appendix B and
the ISODRAFT Reference Guide for details. Setting up the Connection Compatibility
Table should be one of the first tasks to be carried out when commencing a design
project using PDMS.
If an attempt is made to connect two pipework components in DESIGN, then a check is
made to see if the p-leave PCON attribute of the first component and the p-arrive PCON
attribute of the second component appear as a matching pair in the connection table. If
there is such a matching pair then the components are connected, otherwise a similar check
is made on the p-leave PCON attributes of each component. If a matching pair is now found,
the second component is flipped and connected to the first. If no matching pair is found
then an incompatible connection type error message is output and the second component
is left in its original position and orientation.
NEW CCTA
NEW COCO /WELDWELD CTYPE WELD WELD (weld to weld)
NEW COCO /SCRDSCRD CTYPE SCRD SCRD (screwed to screwed)
NEW COCO /WELDBW CTYPE WELD BW (weld to butt weld)
7.4 Bolting Tables
The Bolt Table hierarchy contains information describing the nature of the bolted
connections of Piping Components in a project. Although the Bolt Table is part of the
Catalogue database, and so must be set up using PARAGON, it has been designed for the
exclusive use of ISODRAFT and so is described in detail in the ISODRAFT Reference
Guide; only a summary is presented here. Element creation and attribute setting is done in
the usual way.
The Bolt Table hierarchy is illustrated below:
The element types are as follows:
BTSE - the Bolt Set is the administrative element for catalogue component bolting
information. It owns Bolt P-point (BLTP) elements.
BLTP - the Bolt P-point stores the bolting information for an individual bolt for a
particular type of flange. It has the following attributes:
BLTA - the Bolt Table is an administrative element.
BLIS - the Bolt List is an administrative element which groups together Standard Bolt
(SBOL) elements.
SBOL - the Standard Bolt element. This has the attributes:
LTAB - the Length Table holds a number of Diameter Tables.
DTAB - the Diameter Table stores information on standard bolt lengths, held as a
string of values in its BLEN attribute. DTAB is accessed from the NSTD attribute of the
SBOL element.
NUMBER - the bolt hole number in the bolt circle
BDIA - the bolt diameter
BTHK - the bolt length
BTYPE - the type of bolt
NSTD - a pointer to a non-standard length array
BITEM - additional bolt items to be used when calculating bolt length
BITL - the lengths of the additional bolt items
12.0 2 7:4
7.5 Unit Types
PARAGON enables unit types to be set up which will then be linked to relevant attributes of
the various elements which appear throughout the PDMS databases. The most common
units (the default units) are millimetres, inches or feet and inches, which are usually
assigned to bore and distance attributes. These units currently apply to all PDMS modules
except PROPCON.
You may also define other units with conversion factors to relate one set of units to another;
unit definitions can be collected together into sets to be used for different purposes.
Information controlling units is held in a UNIT element of the Catalogue Database. The
UNITS hierarchy is shown below:
The elements of the UNITS hierarchy are as follows:
UNIT - The UNIT element is the top-level element of the hierarchy. It has three special
attributes: BUNI, DUNI and DFUN. BUNI and DUNI can be set to determine the default
Bore and Distance units, respectively. They are set to any of MM, INCH, MIL or FINC
(for feet and inches). A typical sequence of setup commands would be:
NEWUNI T
BUNI I NCH
DUNI FI NC
This would mean that, by default, all bore values are interpreted as inches and all
distance values, e.g. HEIGHT, DISTANCE, as feet and inches. If user-defined units are
to be used, then an MSET element should be named in the DFUN attribute of the UNIT,
indicating that that MSET element should be used as the default measurement set.
Each PDMS module has its default units initialised at run time to those defined in the
first UNIT element of the first Catalogue DB in the MDB being used. BUNI and DUNI
may also be set to NULL.
MSET - Measurement Set. This element is used to form a collection of MTYP
(measurement type) elements. It is the MSET which is named in the DFUN attribute of
the UNIT element to indicate which collection of units are to be used. In practice MSET
may relate to say S.I. or IMPERIAL.
MTYP - Measurement Type. This element forms the link between a collection of
attributes and the Units Definition (UDEF) to be used for them. The attributes are
accessed via the ATLI (Attribute List) elements owned by the MTYP and the Units
Definition via its UREF attribute. The latter simply contains the name of the UDEF
element which is to be used for the attributes named in the member ATLI elements.
ATLI - Attribute List. Each ATLI element contains (as its ATNA attribute) the name of
the attribute for which the UREF (see above) applies.
USEC - Unit Section. This is an administrative element used to collect together UDEF
elements.
UDEF - Units Definition. One UDEF is required for each non-PDMS unit that you wish
to implement. UDEF has the following special attributes:
ABREV - Abbreviation. This is the abbreviation used when outputting a value
under the control of this UDEF, or when inputting a value which is in a UNIT that is
not the one for that attribute in the current MSET. The attribute is an eight-character
text.
MULT - Multiplier. This is a conversion factor which is used in conjunction with
ADEN, to convert from input/output units to PDMS stored units. This is done on the
basis that:
The exponential facility is useful in the accurate setting of MULT and ADEN. For
example:
MULT 0. 12345 EX - 8
will set MULT to 0.0000000012345
ADEN - see MULT above.
SIGF and DECP - Significant Figures and Decimal Places. These relate to the
output of units.
To summarise, the unit is defined as:
(input_value * MULT ) +ADEN
and is output to SIG significant figures with DEC decimal places and suffixed by the
notation ABREV ( e.g. psi).
7.5.1 Use of Units
In certain PDMS modules, e.g. PROPCON, the choice of units to be used can be indicated
by using the command:
UNITS name
where name is the name of an MSET. If this is not done, the units will be those given by the
DFUN attribute of the UNIT element, as explained above.
Following this, whenever the value of a special attribute is set or queried, its name (e.g.
TEMP for temperature) will be compared with the ATNA attributes of all ATLIs under the
current MSET. If a match is found, then the UREF of the MTYP owning the matching ATLI
will be used to access the relevant UDEF.
When output, such values are followed by their abbreviations to remind you which units are
being used.
If you wish to input a value which is in a UDEF that is not referred to from the current MSET,
then you may use the abbreviation of that value as a key. For instance, in PROPCON, if the
current temperature unit is centigrade, but there is a UDEF defining Fahrenheit (with
abbreviation deg. F), it would appear as
TEMP 35 deg. F
Output value = (Stored value - ADEN) / MULT
Stored value = (Input value * MULT) +ADEN
12.0 2 7:6
As an example, if you require a PROPCON attribute ACBO (Actual Bore) to be output in
inches, then the following syntax would be required:
This results in the following hierarchy:
If ACBO is referred to in PROPCON, the attribute name (ATNA) is searched for in the UNIT
hierarchy. The search then moves up the hierarchy to find the MTYP attribute UREF. The
MULT attribute of the UDEF (found from the UREF) is then applied to the stored ACBO
attribute and the ABREV is output with the resulting value.
As a further example, to define and use a unit system called /IMPERIAL, for which
temperatures (TEMP, PTEM and RTEM) will be in Fahrenheit and pressures (PRES, RPRE
and IPRE) will be in PSI, the instruction sequence would be:
NEWUNI T / EXAMPLE- OF- UNI TS
NEWUSEC
NEWUDEF / PSI
ABRE l bf / i n2 ADEN 0 MULT 6895. 0
NEWUDEF / F
ABRE deg. F ADEN - 17. 778 MULT 0. 55556
NEWMSET / I MPERI AL
NEWMTYP / I MPERI AL/ TEMP
NEW USEC create a new Unit Section
NEW UDEF /INCH create and name a new Units Definition
ABREV IN -set ABREV and MULT attributes
MULT 0.254 EX 2
NEW MSET create a Measurement SetNEW
MTYP create a Measurement Type
UREF /INCH set the Reference Units that the MTYP refers to
NEW ATLI create an Attribute List for the MTYP
ATNA ACBO set the Attribute Name that is required to be output/input in
inches
UREF / F
NEWATLI ATNA TEMP
NEWATLI ATNA PTEM
NEWATLI ATNA RTEM
NEWMTYP / I MPERI AL/ PRESSURE
UREF / PSI
NEWATLI ATNA I PRE
NEWATLI ATNA RPRE
NEWATLI ATNA PRES
Note: It is possible to set up UNIT elements with MSETs containing duplicated ATNAs. This
is not prevented, but a warning is given on attempting to use such an MSET.
7.6 General Text Elements
A TEXT element is used to store additional information about an owning or adjacent
element. The text string itself exists as the setting of the STEX attribute of the TEXT, and
can be up to 120 characters long. It is set in the usual way; for example
STEX Hi gh pr essur e pi pel i ne
Note that the STEX attribute of a TEXT element is completely independent of the STEX
attributes of the Detailing Text (SDTE) elements described in Detailing Text. The TEXT
element can occupy many positions in the hierarchy - it can be owned by UNIT, CATA,
SECT, CATE, STSE, STCA, CCTA, SPEC, BLTA, BLIS, LTAB or MBLI elements.
7.7 User-defined Nominal Dimensions
For users who required bores, bolt diameters and lengths, and rod diameters that are not
included in the standard nominal values stored in core, a facility exists for the creation of
tables that hold the required values in the catalogue database.
When being switched from module to module, the catalogue database is scanned for a
NBRWLD element with the PURP attribute set to BORE indicating that user-defined nominal
bores etc are to be used. If so, the nominal bore-checking routine is switched to the user-
defined nominal bores.
Bores
For most users, the requirement is adding or removing a few bores. For this purpose, a
macro of standard PDMS bores is provided (nominal_bore.mac), which enables a user to
edit the values concerned and then input the User-defined Nominal Bore table into the
catalogue.
Bolts
When there is a need to use a bolting catalogue with both Imperial and Metric projects, there
is not always a direct conversion from one system to the other. For example, a inch bolt
may convert to a 12mm rather than a 13mm one.
To overcome the problem, User-defined Nominal Bolting tables for diameter and length can
be set up, as for the User-defined Nominal Bore table. The PURP attribute is set to BDIA for
bolt diameters and BLEN for bolt lengths.
12.0 2 7:8
Rods
When rods for hangers and supports are specified, the rod diameter is related to the bore
diameter. It is, therefore, necessary to have User-defined Nominal Rod Diameter tables, if
User-defined Nominal bores are being used.
If a hanger connects to a branch with different bores, the rod diameter is selected to match
the branch with the User-defined Nominal bore or, if this applies to neither branch, the
standard piping bore. The PURP attribute is set to ROD.
Database
The following addition is made to the catalogue database:
World element NBRWLD, with:
Attribute PURP.
Owns:
NOMINB elements, with:
Real attribute INCBOR
Inch Nominal Value
Real attribute MMBOR
MM Nominal Value
Datasets
8 Datasets
A Dataset (DTSE) is a collection of DATA elements. These can be used to store any items of
catalogue data which need to be queried directly from within the DESIGN or DRAFT
modules and which are not accessible by other means.
8.1 Attributes of DATA Elements
Each DATA element has the following special attributes:
The PPRO attribute is evaluated in response to the Q PROP... command in DESIGN or
DRAFT. The parameters in the expression may not be defined until the item is added to the
model. It can include any attributes which are valid for the design element, including user-
defined attributes; for example:
((:COST OF OWNER) * :LENGT).
The PPRO attribute can also be set to a parameterised expression which will be used in the
definition of Pointsets and Geomsets. See Controlling the Detailed Checking Procedure.
DKEY Data Key. A PDMS word which allows a specific DATA element to be
referenced from within DESIGN or DRAFT using the Q PROP dkey
command.
PTYP Property Type.
DTIT Data Title. A text string describing the property stored in the DATA.
PPRO Property. Any expression which defines a property of the item with which the
dataset is associated.
DPRO Default Property Value. The value to be used if the true setting of the
Property cannot be evaluated at any time. See Controlling the Detailed
Checking Procedure.
PURP Purpose. A PDMS word showing the purpose for which the stored property is
relevant. For example, PARA (for catalogue parameters), DESP (for design
parameters), DATA (for general properties).
NUMB Number. An integer which may be set to further categorise the specific
property stored in the DATA. For example, the identifying number of a PARAM
or DESPARAM.
PUNI Property Units. The units used when evaluating the Property value.
RUSE Real Property Flag. See Controlling the Detailed Checking Procedure.
12.0 2 8:2
Datasets
8.2 Querying Properties in DESIGN
Consider the following examples, which allow you to query two properties of this
parameterised I-beam in DESIGN:
Example 1: The depth of the beam
Datakey: DEPT
Dtitle: Depth of beam
Pproperty: (PARAM [1] )
Dproperty: 600
Purpose: DATA
Number: 1
The command Q PROP DEPT in DESIGN or DRAFT will return the depth of the current
beam (or the default of 600 if the true value cannot be evaluated).
Example 2: The cross-sectional area of the beam
Datakey: XSEC
Dtitle: Cross-section of beam
Pproperty: (((P [1] - (2 * P[3])) * P[4]) +(2 * (P[2] * P[3]))
Note: PARAM has been shortened to P here to show the format of the expression more
clearly. The full version must be used when setting the attribute.
Purpose: DATA
Number: not relevant here, so leave unset
The command Q PROP XSEC in DESIGN or DRAFT will return the calculated cross-
sectional area of the current beam.
Similarly, you could query the following attributes of this DATA element:
Q PRTI XSEC Data title
Q PRDE XSEC Data description
Q PRPU XSEC Data purpose
Datasets
8.3 Real Properties of P-points, P-Lines and Geomsets
Pointset and Geomset attributes can be defined in terms of a Dataset pseudo-attribute
RPROP (Real Property). For example, the PBORE of a P-point can be defined by the
expression:
PBORE ( PARAM[1] + 20 )
If the dataset associated with the component contains a DATA element with the Datakey
DBOR, and DBOR has its PPRO attribute set to the expression ( PARAM[1] +20 ), PBORE
can be defined as:
PBORE ( RPROP DBOR )
Pointset and Geomsets with attributes defined in terms of RPROPs will have their RFLG
flag set to 1. Only elements with RFLG set to 1 need to be pre-evaluated when the item is
added to a model.
DATA elements have an attribute RUSE. If this attribute is set, the PROP attribute (or default
Property DPRO, see Controlling the Detailed Checking Procedure) cannot be set to a text
expression or to an expression containing the OF notation. RUSE is set (=1) and unset (=0)
using the commands:
SETRuse
UNSETRuse
DATA elements with PROP attributes property which can be used as RPROPs should have
their RUSE flags set. Only elements with RUSE set to 1 need to be pre-evaluated.
8.3.1 Default Values
The DATA element attribute DPRO can be used to store a default property value. When a
Design element is added to the model, the associated dataset is pre-evaluated and the
default value used if the PPRO attribute in the Dataset unset or cannot be evaluated.
The default property value can be queried from DESIGN using the pseudo-attribute PRDE.
8.3.2 Querying
The value of RPROP can be queried using the command:
Q RPROP datakey
This command will return the result RPROP unset if the corresponding PPRO attribute
contains a text string rather than a real value.
The default value of a text or real property value may be queried from a Design component
using the command:
Q PRDE datakey
A list of the datakeys available at a Design item can be obtained using the command:
Q PRLS
12.0 2 8:4
Datasets
Checking Catalogue Database Consistency
9 Checking Catalogue Database Consistency
To avoid having to transfer component design or specification errors from the Catalogue
database to the Design database before data inconsistencies can be detected, a facility is
provided for checking the main settings of a piping catalogue as you build it in PARAGON.
(This facility is not yet available for checking a structural catalogue.)
9.1 Initiating a Standard Data Consistency Check
The basic command to initiate a database consistency check, using default settings, is
CHECK <gid>
where <gid>, the element below which checks are to be carried out, may be any SPEC,
SELE, SPCO or COMP.
If you start the check from within a specification (SPEC, SELE or SPCO) all components
referenced via the starting element will be checked. If you start the check at component
level (COMP), only that component and elements below it will be checked.
(See Section 13.3?? for details of the ways in which you can modify the default checking
procedures.)
9.2 What the Checking Facility Does
The following tests may be carried out:
At SPEC level:
Check that no question in the specification is repeated.
Check that one question in the specification is TYPE.
From the TYPE reference, check that the GTYPE of the COMP has the same setting.
From the TYPE reference, check that the SKEY setting of SDTE is correct.
From the TYPE reference, check that the point set has the correct geometry, as
required by ISODRAFT.
At SPCO level:
Check that all of the following reference attributes are set: CATREF, DETAIL, MATX,
CMPR, BLTREF. (The BLTREF need be set only if the connection type begins with F or
L.)
At COMP or equivalent level:
Check that there is a valid PTREF and GMREF.
At a PTSE, check that P-points are set and that there are no duplicate numbers.
12.0 2 9:2
At a GMSE, check that there are primitives set and that they are not degenerate. Check
also that no invalid P-point numbers or parameters are used. Note that this test uses
catalogue parameters, so that if a primitive is constructed only from design and
insulation parameters, spurious warnings will be generated.
Check that each P-point connection type exists in the COCO tables. P-points used for
construction purposes can have connections of 0.0, NUL or NULL. The connection
type will not be checked for validity for a specific type of component.
Check that a P-point bore is valid for a recognised set of nominal bores. P-points used
for construction purposes, and a P-point with connection type CLOS, can have a zero
bore.
9.3 Controlling the Detailed Checking Procedure
You can modify the effect of the CHECK command by using additional syntax so that you
can check different types of catalogue without generating unnecessary errors.
The command options are as follows:
TOLerance CATAlogue CMPRef ON/OFF
switches Component Reference checking on or off for all component types in a SPCO.
TOLerance CATAlogue CMPRef word ON/OFF
switches Component Reference checking on or off for the specified component type in a
SPCO.
TOLerance CATAlogue GMREf ON/OFF
switches Geomset Reference checking on or off for all component types.
TOLerance CATAlogue GMREf word ON/OFF
switches Geomset Reference checking on or off for the specified component type.
TOLerance CATAlogue BORE ON/OFF
switches bore checking on or off for Pointsets.
TOLerance CATAlogue BORE value value
sets range of permissible bores to be checked for Pointsets.
TOLerance CATAlogue ISOMetric ON/OFF
checks for SKEY and similar ISODRAFT-related settings.
TOLerance CATAlogue DEFault
resets all checking options to their default settings.
These defaults are:
Do not check any CMPREFs.
Ignore GMREF settings for ATTA, FLAN, TUBE and BOLT.
Check nominal bores in the range 6 mm to 2150 mm.
Check all ISODRAFT-related settings.
To query any of the current data consistency checking settings, use the corresponding
command format
Q TOLerance CATAlogue ...
9.4 Error Messages
Error messages which can result from diagnosed data inconsistencies are as follows:
C10 Spec error: Question word asked more than once
C20 Spec error: Question TYPE never asked
C30 Spco error: DETA not set
C40 Spco error: Unknown ref for DETA
C50 Spco error: MATX not set
C60 Spco error: Unknown ref for MATX
C70 Spco error: CMPR not set
C80 Spco error: Unknown ref for CMPR
C90 Spco error: BLTR not set
C100 Spco error: Unknown ref for BLTR
C110 Spco error: CATR not set
C120 Spco error: Unknown ref for CATR
C130 Comp error: PTRE not set
C140 Comp error: Unknown ref for PTRE
C150 Comp error: GMRE not set
C160 Comp error: Unknown ref for GMRE
C170 Ptset error: Duplicate ppoint number integer
C180 Ptset error: No ppoints set
C190 Ptset error: Unknown connection type word for ppoint
C200 Comp error: GTYPE word different from spec TYPE word
C210 Ptset error: Non standard bore value for ppoint
C220 Gmset error: Unknown parameter integer for primitive
C230 Gmset error: Axis defined with unknown Ppointinteger for primitive
C240 Isometric error: Ppointinteger not defined
C250 Isometric error: Cannot calculate angle between Ppointinteger and Ppointinteger
C260 Isometric error: Incorrect angle between Ppointinteger and Ppointinteger. Angle
is value and should be value.
C270 Isometric error: Incorrect angle between Ppointinteger and Ppointinteger. They
should not be parallel.
C280 Gmset error: primitive may be a degenerate primitive
12.0 2 9:4
C290 Isometric error: Ppoint1, Ppoint2 and Ppoint0 should be colinear
C300 Gmset error: primitive cannot be constructed
C310 Gmset error: Expression error for primitive
C820 SKEY not set
C830 SKEY word is used with generic type word, not word
C840 SKEY word not known. Assumed to be user defined.
P-point Conventions for Piping Components
12.0 2 A:1 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
A P-point Conventions for Piping Components
You must use the following conventions for numbering the P-points of Piping Components
so that ISODRAFT can recognise them:
For tube components, there must only be one P-point, P1, which defines the bore and
connection type of both ends of the piece of tube.
For nozzles, the connection P-point (i.e. the P-point for connection to the head or tail
branch) must be P1.
For two-way components, the arrive and leave P-points must be numbered P1 and
P2 (in either order). For two-way valves, the spindle direction must be indicated by P3.
For three-way components, the offline leg must be indicated by P3. The spindle
direction for three-way valves must be specified by using a P-point greater than P3,
which must have its bore unset.
For four-way components, the two straight-through flows must have P-points P1/P2
and P3/P4. The spindle direction for four-way valves must be specified by using a P-
point greater than P4, which must have its bore unset.
For eccentric reducers without a connection point, the flat side must be indicated
by P3. Eccentric reducers with a connection point must use P3, with a valid bore
set, to indicate the connection point and must use P9, with bore unset, for orientation of
the flat side.
For U-bends, the P-points must be set as shown in Figure A:1.: P-point Numbering
Convention for U-bends.
Figure A:1. P-point Numbering Convention for U-bends
See the ISODRAFT Reference Manual for further details.
A.1 Special Components
A.1.1 Implied Tube
Implied tube is special because it only requires one ppoint and does not require a geometry
set. Because tube has a default geometry set, the parameters for tube are fixed by
convention as:
12.0 2 A:2
Parameter 1 Nominal Bore
Parameter 2 Outside Diameter
Parameter 3 Connection Type
Parameter 4 onwards may be used for any other purpose but will not affect the geometry.
A.1.2 Mitred Bends
Mitred Bends are essentially piping components fabricated from tube cut at angles and
welded together. Prior to version 12.0 of PDMS, these components were catalogue
components with a complex geometry set. Although the bend shown appears to have a
square end, the tube lengths are calculated to the longest side of the cuts and the start and
end segments are treated as part of the arrive and leave tube for material purposes. These
two end parts are deemed as virtual segments in PDMS because they don't cut the pipe at
P1 and P2
To enable this more intelligent use of mitred bends, a default geometry set has been built in
to PDMS for conventional mitred bend types. The default geometry set is used in a similar
way to tube where a default geometry set is used if the component GTYP is a BEND and the
geometry reference is unset.
A bend pointset is required to define arrive and leave points with P1 and P2 defined and
positioned by either parameters or DDANGLE and DDRADIUS. The same pointset will be
applicable if it is a pulled or mitred bend.
In the design database, a BEND element now has a new attribute NCUTS which determines
how many cuts to apply to each bend. This is only used if the bend has no geometry set, so
existing bends will be unaffected. Any bends with NCUTS set to zero or less will be treated
as a pulled bend. The default value for NCUTS is 0.
Pipe Bore, Connection type and PPOINT positions are all required to enable connection
between components. Additionally a pipe outside diameter is required to enable the
component size to be determined. Like implied tube, the order in which these parameters
are built is important and should be as follows:
Parameter 1 Nominal Bore
Parameter 2 Outside Diameter
Parameter 3 Connection Type
Parameter 4 default NCUTS
Parameter 5 onwards may be used for any other purpose but will not affect the geometry
A.1.3 How End Cuts Work
The values assigned to parameter 4 are important in how they apply to the design. Any
positive values of NCUT from zero will be interpreted in the design as the number of cuts so
if parameter 4 is set to 3 then the design component will have 3 cuts regardless of the
setting in DESIGN. Setting parameter 4 to 0 will mean that the bend is treated like a pulled
bend and will not have any cuts available.
This means that the parameter4 setting will override any changes to the NCUTS attribute in
DESIGN and the user will not be able to modify it. This is necessary so that the type of
bends to be used can be controlled via a specification and so that ISODRAFT can get the
correct SKEY and number of cuts.
If the user wants to have fully variable cuts and freedom to re-specify NCUTS then setting
parameter 4 to a negative number will result in an uncontrolled bend where the user must
specify how many cuts to use. The maximum number of cuts per bend is 25
A.1.4 Dynamic PPOINTS
In order to calculate dimensions and tube lengths, a set of dynamic ppoints are provided to
suit the number of cuts being used. For example on a single cut bend we would require a
ppoint on the inside centre and outside as shown below plus extra cuts if insulation is
added.
The points are arranged with the centreline ppoint as number 10, Inside point as 11 outside
point as 12 and then points 13 and 14 as the inside and outside insulation points
respectively.
Because of the dynamic nature of the ppoints, the ppoint numbers are directly related to
individual cuts, multiplied by ten, so cut 1 will have five ppoints numbered from 10 to 14 and
cut 2 will have five ppoints from 20 to 24. additional ppoints will be available for each
additional cut defined by the cut number times ten with the same configuration as described
earlier.
12.0 2 A:4
A.1.5 Pseudo Attributes
To find out if a bend is a new type of mitred bend, there is a new pseudo attribute ACTNCU
to get the actual ncuts value in either the catalogue or from the design. If ACTNCU returns
zero, then it is not a mitred bend.
The pseudo attributes ATLE, LTLE, TLE and FITLEN now return the maximum cut length of
the relevant implied tube. To get the tube lengths of the individual segments and virtual
segments the following can be used.
BSCLL Bend Segment Centre-Line Length
BSMXL Bend Segment MaXimum Length
BSMNL Bend Segment MiNimum Length
BVSCLL Bend Virtual Segment Centre-Line Length
BVSMXL Bend Virtual Segment MaXimum Length
BVSMNL Bend Virtual Segment MiNimum Length
A.1.6 Implied Geometry sets in PARAGON
Components with implied geometry sets cannot currently be visualised in PARAGON other
than showing the pointset locations.
Setting Up a Catalogue
12.0 2 B:1 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
B Setting Up a Catalogue
B.1 Naming Conventions
It is important that certain items in the Catalogue database are named as they are
referenced from other databases as well as internally. It would be impracticable to allow
system-generated database reference numbers to be referenced as this would lead to
meaningless output from reports and isometrics.
Figure B-1 shows the relationship between the Design, Specification, and Catalogue
databases. Consistency when naming items is important, making cross-database
connections as easily identifiable as possible.
In ISODRAFT, bolt lengths for Piping Components are derived by referring to the SBOL
name. Item detail is picked up from the RTEX attribute of the DTEX and the material is
picked up from the XTEX attribute of the MTEX.
Note that the item code name on an isometric is obtained from the second part of the
SPREF attribute of a Component, i.e. its name in the Specification. In the example in Figure
B-1, the name would be output as FLANWN300100. See the ISODRAFT Reference Manual
for further details.
B.2 Example Connection Type Codes
Naming of the P-point PCON attribute of a Piping Component requires early consideration.
The PCON name is for use mainly in data consistency checking, but also by ISODRAFT for
working out bolting details. The rules for ISODRAFT are as follows:
The first letter of the PCON attribute of a flange must be F or L (the latter for lap
joints)
The first letter of the PCON attribute of a gasket must be G
The first letter of the PCON attribute of a wafer fitting must be W
The list below is not exhaustive and only shows example codes - it is not mandatory.
Item and/or Connection Type Code
300lb Raised-Face Flange FGD
300lb Gasket GGD
Pipe Bevelled End TUB
Butt Weld BWD
Socket Weld SWF
12.0 2 B:2
B.3 The Connection Compatibility Table
The table in the previous section can be used to construct a PDMS Connection
Compatibility Table (CCTA) which sets out all the permissible connection pairs.
If an attempt is made to connect two pipework components in DESIGN, then a check is
made to see if the p-leave PCON attribute of the first component and the p-arrive PCON
attribute of the second component appear as a matching pair in the connection table. If
there is such a matching pair then the components are connected, otherwise a similar check
is made on the p-leave PCON attributes of each component. If a matching pair is now found,
the second component is flipped and connected to the first. If no matching pair is found
then an incompatible connection type error message is output and the second component
is left in its original position and orientation.
The following sample connection table uses the connection list given in the previous
section:
NEWCCTAB
NEWCOCO / FGDGGD
CTYPE FGD GGD
NEWCOCO / TUBBWD
CTYPE TUB BWD
NEWCOCO / GGDWGD
CTYPE GGD WGD
300lb Wafer Fitting WGD
Screwed Male SCM
Screwed Female SCF
Item and/or Connection Type Code
NEWCOCO / TUBSWF
CTYPE TUB SWF
NEWCOCO / SCMSWF
CTYPE SCM SWF
NEWCOCO / SCFTUB
CTYPE SCF TUB
The COCO (Connection Compatibility) elements are named so that the allowable
connections are easily queried.
The above table shows, for example, that tube can be connected to a screwed female
connection but not to a screwed male connection.
Different ratings of flanges and gaskets should have different connection attributes to
ensure that different pressure fittings cannot be connected without a warning message
being issued. This principle also applies to different flange face characteristics, e.g. flat face
and raised face: however, there are some exceptions. On some jobs a flat-faced flange on
a piece of equipment may be butted up to a raised-face flange. If this is a common
occurrence, it may be worth inputting a new COCO to allow the connection.
12.0 2 B:4
Construction of Typical Piping Components
12.0 2 C:1 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
C Construction of Typical Piping Components
This Appendix gives sample macros for the construction of typical Catalogue Piping
Components using PARAGON.
Each macro starts at CATEGORY level. The view parameters used to produce the drawings
shown vary between each example, and so are not given here. Each drawing has
REPRESENTATION settings of TUBE ON CENTRELINE ON PPOINTS ON NUMBERS
ON. Some of the Components are too large to fit onto a typical view area when drawn at the
default SCALE value of 1. Values of 0.5 are suggested for examples 1 and 3, and 0.05 for
example 6.
The definition for each Component includes the possibility of insulation being present,
although this is not drawn. Note how the clash geometry and component geometry have
been combined.
Figure C:1. A Control Valve, using the SDSH primitive
NEWPTSE / CVMWPS
NEWGMSE / CVMWGS
NEWSCOM / CVMW
GTYP I NST PARA 25 100 133 17. 5 FLGD
PTRE / CVMWPS
GMRE / CVMWGS
MODEL CE
12.0 2 C:2
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
PCON ( PARAM[ 5] ) NUMB 1 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] )
PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] ) PAXI - Y
NEWPTAX
PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] ) PAXI Y
NEWPTAX
PCON NULL NUM 3 PBOR 0 PDI S ( 2. 50 * PARAM[ 4] ) PAXI X
/ CVMW
GOTO GMRE
NEWSCYL
PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] ) PHEI ( - 2 * PARAM[ 2] ) PDI A ( PARAM[ 3] ) PAXI Y
NEWSCYL
PDI S 0 PHEI ( 2. 5 * PARAM[ 2] ) PDI A ( 1. 6 * PARAM[ 2] ) PAXI X
NEWSSPH
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI S 0 PAXI - Y PDI A ( 0. 50 *
PARAM[ 1] )
NEWSCON
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI S ( 2. 5 * PARAM[ 2] ) PDI A ( 1. 6 *
PARAM[ 2] )
PAXI X
NEWSDSH
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI A ( 1. 6 * PARAM[ 2] ) PHEI ( 0. 8 *
PARAM[ 2] )
PDI S ( 2. 5 * PARAM[ 2] ) PAXI X
NEWSCYL
OBST 0 TUFL TRUE PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] ) PHEI ( - 1 * PARAM[ 4] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAXI - Y
NEWSCYL COPY PREV PAXI Y
OBST 0 TUFL TRUE PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] ) PHEI ( - 1. 0 * PARAM[ 4] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAXI Y
NEWLSNO
OBST 0 TUFL TRUE PTDI ( PARAM[ 2] - PARAM[ 4] ) PBDI 0
PTDM ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PBDM ( 1 + I PARAM[ 1] )
PAAX - Y PBAX Z
NEWLSNO COPY PREV PAAX Y
NEWLSNO
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PTDI ( PARAM[ 2] ) PBDI 0
PTDM ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PBDM ( 1 + I PARAM[ 1] )
PAAX - Y PBAX Z
NEWLSNO COPY PREV PAAX Y
$.
Figure C:2. An Unequal Tee
NEWPTSE / MWTPTSET
NEWGMSE / MWTGMSET
NEWSCOM / MWNEQTEE
GTYP TEE PARA 100 80 114 90 BWD 105 80 15 10
PTRE / MWTPTSET
GMRE / MWTGMSET
MODEL CE
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
NEWPTAX COPY PREV PAXI Y NUM 2
NEWPTAX
PDI S ( PARAM[ 7] ) PAXI X
/ MWNEQTEE
GOTO GMRE
NEWLI NE
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE P1 P2
NEWLI NE
NEWSSPH
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PDI S 0 PAXI P1 PDI A ( PARAM[ 8] )
NEWSSPH
COPY PREV PAXI P2
NEWSSPH
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE LEVE 0 2 PDI S 0 PAXI P3
PDI A ( PARAM[ 9] )
NEWSCYL
TUFL TRUE PDI S 0 PHEI ( - 2 * PARAM[ 6] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 3] ) PAXI P1
NEWSCYL
TUFL TRUE PDI S 0 PHEI ( PARAM[ 7] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 4] ) PAXI X
END
$.
12.0 2 C:4
Figure C:3. A Weld Neck Flange
NEWPTSE / MWFLPS
NEWGMSE / MWFLGS
NEWSCOM / MWWNFLAN
GTYP FLAN PARA 100 114 254 30 56 180 TUB FLGD 20
PTRE / MWFLPS
GMRE / MWFLGS
MODEL CE
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
PDI S 0 PAXI - Y
NEWPTAX
PCON ( PARAM[ 7] ) NUMB 2 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PAXI Y
PDI S ( PARAM[ 4] + PARAM[ 5] )
/ MWWNFLAN
GOTO GMRE
NEWSCYL
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI S 0 PHEI ( PARAM[ 4] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAXI Y
NEWLI NE
NEWSSPH
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PDI S 0 PAXI P2 PDI A ( PARAM[ 9] )
NEWLSNO
TUFL TRUE PTDI ( PARAM[ 5] + PARAM[ 4] )
PBDI ( PARAM[ 4] ) PBDM ( PARAM[ 6] + I PARAM[ 1] )
PTDM ( PARAM[ 2] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAAX Y PBAX X POFF 0
END
$.
Figure C:4. A Concentric Reducer
NEWPTSE / MWRPTSET
NEWGMSE / MWRGMSET
NEWSCOM / MWCR2
GTYP REDU PARA 100 80 110 90 102 0 BWD 15 10
PTRE / MWRPTSET
GMRE / MWRGMSET
MODEL CE
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
NUMB 1 PCON ( PARAM[ 7] ) PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S 0 PAXI - Y
NEWPTCA
NUMB 2 PCON ( PARAM[ 7] ) PBOR ( PARAM[ 2] ) PX 0
PY ( PARAM[ 5] ) PZ ( - 1 * PARAM[ 6] )
NEWPTAX
NUMB 3 PDI S 0 PAXI - Z
/ MWCR2
GOTO GMRE
NEWLI NE
NEWSSPH OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PDI S 0 PAXI P1 PDI A ( PARAM[ 8] )
NEWSSPH OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PDI S 0 PAXI P2 PDI A ( 0. 65 *
PARAM[ 9] )
NEWLSNO
TUFL TRUE PTDI ( PARAM[ 5] )
PBDI 0 PTDM ( PARAM[ 4] + I PARAM[ 1] )
PBDM ( PARAM[ 3] + I PARAM[ 1] )
PAAX Y PBAX - Z POFF ( PARAM[ 6] )
END
$.
12.0 2 C:6
Figure C:5. An Elbow
NEWPTSE / MWPS35
NEWGMSE / MWGS34
NEWSCOM / MWEL5
GTYP ELBO PARA 50 60 25 75 15 SWF
PTRE / MWPS35
GMRE / MWGS34
MODEL CE
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
NEWPTAX
PDI S ( PARAM[ 3] ) PAXI Y 45 X
/ MWEL5
GOTO GMRE
NEWLI NE
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE P1 T0 P2
NEWSCTO
TUFL TRUE PAAX P1 PBAX P2 PDI A ( PARAM[ 2] + I PARAM[ 1] )
NEWLSNO
OBST 0 CLFL TRUE PTDI ( PARAM[ 5] ) PBDI 0. 00 PTDM ( PARAM[ 4] +
I PARAM[ 1] )
PBDM ( PARAM[ 4] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAAX P1 PBAX Z TVI S FALSE
NEWLSNO COPY PREV PAAX P2
NEWSCYL OBST 0
TUFL TRUE PHEI ( PARAM[ 5] )
PDI A ( PARAM[ 4] + I PARAM[ 1] ) PAXI P1
NEWSCYL COPY PREV PAXI P2
END
$.
Figure C:6. A Mitred Elbow, using SSLC Primitives
NEWPTSE / MWPTESTC1
NEWGMSE / MWGTESTC1
NEWSCOM / MWLOBST- 51
GTYP ELBO PARA 500 2000 398. 7 - 550 - 152. 2 - 1234. 6 - 585. 5 BWDN
PTRE / MWPTESTC1
GMRE / MWGTESTC1
MODEL CE
GOTO PTRE
NEWPTAX
PCON ( PARAM[ 8] ) NUMB 1 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] )
PAXI - Y
NEWPTAX
PCON ( PARAM[ 8] ) NUMB 2 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S ( PARAM[ 2] )
PAXI X
NEWPTCA
NUMB 3 PX ( - PARAM[ 6] ) PY ( PARAM[ 5] ) PZ 0
PTCDI R - X 24 - Y
NEWPTCA
PTCDI R - X 45 - Y
NEWPTCA
PTCDI R - Y 24 - X
/ MWLOBST- 51
GOTO GMRE
NEWSRTO
PAAX P1 PBAX P2
PDI A ( - 1. 2 * PARAM[ 4] )
PHEI ( PARAM[ 3] )
NEWSSLC OBST 0
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI A ( PARAM[ 4] ) PHEI ( - PARAM[ 3] ) PDI S 0
PAXI P1 PXTS - 11. 5
NEWSSLC OBST 0
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI A ( PARAM[ 4] ) PHEI ( - PARAM[ 3] ) PDI S 0
PAXI P2 PXTS 11. 5
12.0 2 C:8
NEWSSLC OBST 0
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PDI A ( PARAM[ 4] ) PHEI ( - 2 * PARAM[ 3] )
PDI S ( PARAM[ 3] ) PAXI P3 PXTS - 11. 5 PXBS 11. 5
NEWSSLC COPY PREV PAXI P4
NEWSSLC COPY PREV PAXI P5
END
$.
Figure C:7. A Rectangular Cross Section Pipe, using BOXI primitives
PARAGON Syntax:
NEWPTSE / PBOXI 2
NEWPTAX
PCON BWD NUM 1 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S 0 PAXI - Y
END OF END
NEWGMSE / GBOXI 2
NEWBOXI
PAXI P1 PXLE ( PARAM[ 3] ) PZLE ( PARAM[ 2] ) CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE
END OF END
NEWPTSE / PELBO
NEWPTAX
PCON BWD NUM 1 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S 250
PAXI - Y
END
NEWPTAX
PAXI X
END OF END
NEWGMSE / GELBO
NEWSRTO
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PAAX P1 PBAX P2 PDI A ( PARAM[ 2] )
PHEI ( PARAM[ 3] )
END OF END
NEWPTSE / PVELBO
NEWPTAX
PAXI - Y
END
NEWPTAX
PAXI Z
END OF END
NEWPTSE / PWELD
NEWPTAX
PCON BWD NUM 1 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S 0 PAXI Y
END
NEWPTAX
PCON BWD NUM 2 PBOR ( PARAM[ 1] ) PDI S 0 PAXI - Y
END OF END
NEWGMSE / GWELD
NEWSSPH
CLFL TRUE TUFL TRUE PAXI P1 PDI A ( PARAM[ 2] )
END OF END
NEWSCOM / BOX100
GTYP TUBE PARA 300100 100 300
END
OLD SCOM / BOX100
PTRE PTSE / PBOXI 2 GMRE GMSE / GBOXI 2
NEWSCOM / HELBO100
GTYP ELBO PARA 300100 300 100
END
OLD SCOM / HELBO100
PTRE / PELBO GMRE / GELBO
NEWSCOM / VELBO100
GTYP ELBO PARA 300100 100 300
END
OLD SCOM / VELBO100
PTRE / PVELBO GMRE / GELBO
NEWSCOM / BWELD100
GTYP WELD PARA 300100 200
END
OLD SCOM / BWELD100
PTRE / PWELD GMRE / GWELD
SPECON Macro:
NEWSPECI FI CATI ON / BOXI . SPEC
MATREF =0
FLUREF =0
RATI NG 0. 000
LI NETYPE NUL
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF
BLTREF
TUBE */ D300X100 300100. 0 / BOX101 =0 =0 =0
=0
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 STYP CATREF DETAI L MATXT
CMPRE BLTREF
ELBO */ HB300X100 300100. 0 H / HELBO101 =0 =0 =0
=0
ELBO */ VB300X100 300100. 0 V / VELBO101 =0 =0 =0
=0
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF
BLTREF
WELD */ W300X100 300100. 0 / BWELD101 =0 =0 =0
=0
$.
12.0 2 C:10
DESIGN Syntax:
NEWPI PE
SPEC BOXI . SPEC
NEWBRAN / BOXI BRAN
HPOS E0 HBOR 300100 HDI R N HCON BWD
TPOS E2500 N7000 U1000 TDI R S TBOR 300100 TCON BWD
NEWWELD SEL CONN TO PH AND P0 I S U
SPRE / BOXI . SPEC/ W300X100 LSTU / BOXI . SPEC/ D300X100 ORI F TRUE
POSF TRUE
NEWELBO SEL WI STYP V
THRO N5000 DI R U
NEWELBO SEL WI STYP H
THRO U1000 DI R E
NEWELBO SEL WI STYP V
THRO PT DI R N
NEWWELD SEL CONN TO PT AND P0 I S E
END
Note: That it is assumed that a COCO element allowing BWD to BWD connections already
exists in your database.
Summary of Element Types
12.0 2 D:1 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
D Summary of Element Types
This appendix contains a glossary of the element types which you can use in PARAGON,
and a list of them grouped according to their function. Some element types can be created
and deleted in PARAGON, and have their standard attributes of NAME and LOCK changed,
but must have their particular attributes set by other PDMS modules. These are indicated by
references to the appropriate manuals.
The list of element types is the list of special nouns for PARAGON (its <snoun>syntax
diagram).
D.1 Glossary
For each element type, this glossary gives
the short name (four characters) as it is displayed on the screen
the full name: the minimum abbreviation which can be used in a command is shown in
uppercase
a brief description
Short Name Full Name Description
ATLI ATLIst Attribute List
BLIS BLISt Bolt List
BLTA BLTAble Bolt Table
BOXI BOXIng Boxing (3D Geomset primitive)
CATE CATEgory Piping Category
CATA CATAlogue Catalogue DB
CCTA CCTAble Connection Compatibility Table
COCO COCO Connection Compatibility Elemen
COMP COMPonent Piping Component
DATA DATA Data
DTAB DTABle Diameter Table
DTEX DTEXt Detailing Text
DTSE DTSEt Dataset
FITT FITTing Fitting Component
12.0 2 D:2
GMSE GMSEt 3D Geomset
GMSS GMSSet Structural Ge
GPWL GPWL Group World
GROU GROUp Group
J OIN J OINt J oint Component
LCYL LCYLinder Cylinder (3D Geomset primitive)
LINE LINEs Line (3D Geomset primitive)
LPYR LPYRamid Pyramid (3D Geomset primitive)
LSNO LSNOut Snout (3D Geomset primitive)
LTAB LTABle Length Table
MSET MSET Measurement Set
MTEX MTEXt Material Text
MTYP MTYPe Measurement Type
NGMS NGMSet Negative 3D Geomset
NLCY NLCYlinder Negative Cylinder (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NLPY NLPYramid Negative Pyramid (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NLSN NLSNout Negative Snout (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSBO NSBOx Negative Box (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSCO NSCOne Negative Cone (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSCT NSCTorus Negative Circular Torus (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSCY NSCYlinder Negative Cylinder (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSDS NSDSh Negative Dish (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NSEX NSEXtrusion Negative User-defined Extrusion (Negative 3D Geomset
primitive)
NSRE NSREvolution Negative Solid of Revolution (Negative 3D Geomset
primitive)
NSRT NSRTorus Negative Rectangular Torus (Negative 3D Geomset
primitive)
NSSL NSSLcylinder Negative Slope-Bottomed Cylinder (Negative 3D
Geomset primitive)
NSSP NSSPhere Negative Sphere (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
NTUB NTUBe Negative Implied Tube (Negative 3D Geomset primitive)
PART PART Equipment Component
PROF PROFile Profile Component
PTAX PTAXis Axial P-point
PTCA PTCAr Cartesian P-point
PLIN PLINe P-line
PTMI PTMIx Mixed Type P-point
PTSE PTSEt 3D Pointset (with P-point member elements)
PTSS PTSSet Structural Pointset (with P-line member elements)
SANN SANNulus Structural Annulus (Structural Geomset primitive)
SBOL SBOLt Single Bolt (or Standard Bolt) Element
SBOX SBOX Box (3D Geomset primitive)
SCOM SCOMponent Piping Component
SCON SCONe Cone (3D Geomset primitive)
SCTO SCTOrus Circular Torus (3D Geomset primitive)
SCYL SCYLinder Cylinder (3D Geomset primitive)
SDIS SDISc/SDISk Disc (3D Geomset primitive)
SDSH SDSH Dish (3D Geomset primitive)
SDTE SDTExt Detailing Text
SECT SECTion Piping Section
SELE SELEc Selector - see the SPECON Reference Guide.
SEXT SEXTrusion User-defined Extrusion (3D Geomset primitive)
SFIT SFITting Fitting Component
SJ OI SJ OInt J oint Component
SLOO SLOOp Structural Loop (3D Geomset primitive)
SMTE SMTExt Material Text
SPRF SPRFile Profile Component
SPWL SPWL Specification World - see the SPECON Reference Guide
SPCO SPCOm Specification Component - see the SPECON Reference
Guide
SPRO SPROfile Structural Profile (Structural Geomset primitive)
SPEC SPECi Specification - see the SPECON Reference Guide
SPVE SPVErtex Structural Profile Vertex (Structural Geomset primitive)
SREC SRECtangle Structural Rectangle (Structural Geomset primitive)
SREV SREVolution Solid of Revolution (3D Geomset primitive)
SRTO SRTOrus Rectangular Torus (3D Geomset primitive)
12.0 2 D:4
D.2 Functional Groups
3D Pointset elements:
Structural Pointset elements:
3D Geomset elements:
Negative 3D Geomset elements:
SSLC SSLCylinder Slope-Bottomed Cylinder (3D Geomset primitive)
SSPH SSPHere Sphere (3D Geomset primitive)
STCA STCAtegory Structural Category
STSE STSEction Structural Section
SVER SVERtex Structural Vertex (3D Geomset primitive)
TEXT TEXT Text
TUBE TUBE Implied Tube (3D Geomset primitive)
UDEF UDEFinition Units Definition
UNIT UNIT Unit Element
USEC USECtion Unit Section
PTSEt PTAXi PTCAr PTMIx
PTSSet PLINe
GMSEt SBOX SDISc SDISk SCONe
LSNOut SDSH BOXIng SSLCylinder SSPHere
LCYLinder SCYLinder LINEs SCTOrus SRTOrus
TUBE LPYRamid SEXTrusion SREVolution SLOOp
SVERtex
NGMSEt NSBOx NSCOne NLSNout NSDSh
NSSLcylinder NSSPhere NLCYlinder NSCYlinder NSCTorus
NSRTorus NLPYramid NSEXtrusion NSREvolution SLOOp
SVERtex
Structura Geomset elements:
Dataset elements:
Piping Components:
Profile Components:
Joint Components:
Fitting Components:
Material Text elements:
Detailing Text elements:
Group World elements:
Specification World elements (see the SPECON Reference Guide):
Catalogue administrative elements:
GMSSet SRECtangle SANNulus SPROfile SPVErtex
DTSEt DATA
SCOMponent COMPonent number
SPRFile PROFile number
SJ OInt J OINt number
SFITting (NOT FITTing number)
SMTExt MTEXt number
SDTExt DTEXt number
GPWL GROUp
SPWL SPECi SELEc SPCOm
CATAlogue SECTion STSEction CATEgory STCAtegory
TEXT
12.0 2 D:6
Catalogue Components:
Bolt Table elements:
Connection Table elements:
Units elements:
PART
BLTAble BLISt SBOLt LTABle MBOLt
MBLIst DTABle
CCTAble COCO
UNIT MSET MTYP ATLIst USECtion
UDEFinition
SPECON
General Description
SPECON, the PDMS Specification Constructor module, is used to create or modify the
Specification (SPEC) elements in Catalogue Databases.
These Specifications govern the choice of components from the catalogue. They must have
been set up, together with the rest of the Catalogue DB, before design work takes place. In
principle, therefore, SPECON will be one of the first modules to be used when a new PDMS
project is initiated, although in practice it is likely that a company-wide library of Catalogues
and Specifications will be created independently of any individual design project and
accessed by subsequent users to ensure overall standardisation and quality control.
SPECON enables you to input new Specifications, to modify existing Specifications, and to
output Specifications to your terminal or to a file (to be printed or input again at a later date).
A facility is provided so that you can make changes to a Specification without losing
compatibility between existing design data and earlier versions of that Specification. This is
achieved by maintaining valid references to obsolescent components in the Specification
while preventing their selection in new designs.
1.1 Who This Manual is Meant For
In most companies the responsibility for creating Catalogues and Specifications is restricted
to a team of Standards Engineers within the Production Engineering Department or its
equivalent. You might, therefore, be a member of such a team setting up or updating a
Specification. Alternatively, you might be a pipework or structural designer who needs to use
a Specification to select a suitable component and who wishes to understand the principles
underlying the selection process.
You are assumed to be familiar with the general principles of using PDMS, although some of
the most relevant points are repeated in this manual as a reminder.
1.2 How This Manual is Set Out
Catalogues and Specifications describes the structure and use of the Catalogue DB.
This explains where the Specifications created by SPECON fit into the overall
component selection process.
How To Use SPECON explains how to use the various SPECON commands for
creating, modifying or interrogating Specifications.
Details of Typical Specifications expands the information given in How To Use
SPECON by detailing all the options which you are likely to use when setting up
Specifications for the most relevant classes of design components (Pipework,
Structures and Insulation).
12.0 3 1:2
General Description
Command Syntax Diagrams formalises the full command syntax applicable to each
user option. It is the definitive reference section for clarifying any command queries
which arise.
Error Messages explains the significance of any error messages which might be output
during the use of SPECON.
Nominal Pipe Size Tables contains the tables of pipe nominal bore sizes held within
PDMS.
2 Catalogues and Specifications
Note: Words of four or five uppercase characters in this chapter represent PDMS elements
(for example, CATA, BLTAB, SPREF). PDMS stores these as four character names
only; the fifth character is given here to make the abbreviations easier to understand.
For example, SPREF (rather than SPRE) is used for Specification Reference
Note: The elements referred to throughout this manual by the names COMP, FITT, DTEXT
and MTEXT are stored in the PDMS database hierarchy as SCOM, SFIT, SDTE and
SMTE elements, respectively. The simplified names, which omit the S prefix, are
used here because they are easier to interpret as you read the manual.
2.1 Catalogue DB
The information held in a Catalogue DB is split into several functional groups which together
completely define every aspect of the components listed within that catalogue. These
functional groups, which are the highest level elements in the Catalogue DB below WORLD,
are shown in Figure 2:1.: The top-level structure of a Catalogue DB.
Figure 2:1. The top-level structure of a Catalogue DB
CATA Component Catalogue elements hold the physical descriptions of both
piping and structural components (Geomsets, Pointsets etc.), plus any text
used to describe the components in schedules, on isometrics etc. It is
primarily the elements below CATA which will be accessed via the
Specifications.
SPWLD Specification World elements hold the detailed Specifications which
enable you to select suitable components from the CATAs for a given
purpose. It is the elements below SPWLD which are manipulated by
SPECON and which are, therefore, of most relevance in this manual.
CCTAB Connection Compatibility (COCO) Tables hold lists of all compatible
types of connection.
12.0 3 2:2
That part of the hierarchy below a Catalogue element which is relevant when considering
Specifications is shown in Figure 2:2.: Part of the structure of a CATA element. (The options
CATE, STCAT and TEXT have been omitted; see the PARAGON Reference Manual for a
fuller explanation.)
Figure 2:2. Part of the structure of a CATA element
BLTAB Bolt Tables contain details of all bolts needed to connect flanged
components together in any legal combinations. The BLTAB members will
be referenced from the Specifications for appropriate types of component.
UNITS Dimensional Unit elements define the default units of measurement for
geometric information.
GPWLD Group Worlds hold definitions of any groups of elements which may have
been created. See the DESIGN Reference Manual for further details.
PRTWLD Part Worlds hold definitions of any part families that may have been
created.
TABWLD Table Worlds hold definitions of any Coco, Branch or Reducer tables that
may have been created.
COMP Component elements hold the definitions of piping components. These
definitions comprise pointers to GMSET (Geomset) and PTSET (Pointset)
elements, plus lists of parameters which specify the exact type, size and
geometry of each component (that is, the components Attributes,
including its GTYPE).
PROF Profile, J oint and Fitting elements hold the definitions of corresponding
JOIN structural components. These definitions comprise pointers to GMSET,
FITT GMSSET, PTSET and PTSSET elements, plus lists of specific
attributes, in a similar way to COMP elements.
CATA Component Catalogue elements hold the physical descriptions of both
piping and structural components (Geomsets, Pointsets etc.), plus any text
used to describe the components in schedules, on isometrics etc. It is
primarily the elements below CATA which will be accessed via the
Specifications.
2.2 Content and Format of a Specification
The component Specifications, which define the availability of components for particular
types of use, are held in the SPWLD (Specification World) Elements of the Catalogue DB.
These elements, which are at the same hierarchic level as the CATA elements, can own the
simple hierarchy of elements shown in Figure 2:3.: The structure of a SPWLD element.
Figure 2:3. The structure of a SPWLD element
A SPEC is equivalent to an engineering specification for a given class of piping or structural
component. It may contain all components of a given material, for example carbon steel, or
all components for a given class of use, for example all piping components with a particular
pressure rating. Such a SPEC comprises tabulated data of the type illustrated in Figure 2:4.:
Part of a typical Specification for piping components, where each headed question column
represents a SELEC and each horizontal row represents an SPCOM.
It is possible to allocate a default value to most SELEC options, to be used if that particular
attribute is not defined during the selection process. The default setting is shown in the
tabulated SPEC immediately below the corresponding column heading (the SELEC
element) for that attribute.
Note: Default values are not allowed for NAME or TYPE, or for reference pointers such as
CATREF and DETAIL.
It is also possible to define overall specification pointers and settings which apply to the
whole SPEC, not just to individual SPCOMs. These are shown at the top of the SPEC
listing, before the Heading, as shown by the entries MATREF, FLUREF, RATING and
LINETYPE in Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components.
DTEXT Detailing Text elements hold text which may be used to describe
components in schedules and on isometrics. (They also hold the SKEYs
which define the symbols used to represent components in isometric
drawings; see the PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual.)
MTEXT Material Text elements hold text which may be used to describe the
materials of construction of the components.
12.0 3 2:4
The meanings of the various parts of the Specification, and lists of valid attributes
(corresponding to the column headings) which apply to particular types of component
specification, are detailed in Details of Typical Specifications.
Figure 2:4. Part of a typical Specification for piping components
2.3 How Component Selection Works
This section explains how the tabulated Specification (SPEC) data is used to choose an
appropriate piping component from the complete catalogue. Similar principles apply to
structural components and equipment nozzles, although for these you may also use the
catalogue without a Specification.
The SELEC elements are generated automatically from the tabular SPECON input for a
given SPEC and hold all information about those attributes of a component which determine
its availability for a given purpose. For any given set of design criteria, the route through the
SELECtors follows a question and answer sequence to determine which SPCOM is
suitable. Each question relates to a specific item in the specification and each answer leads
to the next relevant question in a logical progression. Any given combination of answers
should correspond to one, and only one, SPCOM.
The types of information considered at the SELEC decision points for PDMS piping
components might include:
Generic type; for example, BEND, TEE, VALV etc.
Bore(s)
Angle(s) between multiple inlets/outlets and so on.
In addition to these specifying attributes, each SPCOM contains a pointer to a COMP, which
meets all the listed specifications, in a CATA element. It is this pointer, known as the
Catalogue Reference (CATREF), which forms the key to correct component selection
when new pipework is being designed.
Each SPCOM also contains pointers to detailing text (DETAIL points to DTEXT), material
text (MATXT points to MTEXT), bolting requirements (BLTREF points to BLTAB),
component properties (CMPREF points to CMPT in a Properties DB) and part
requirements (PRTREF).
There are two essential links which ensure that an appropriate component is selected
during the design of new pipework or a new structure, namely:
Design Component to Specification
Specification to Catalogue Component
Thus, when a new pipe component is to be selected for inclusion in a Design DB, the
following sequence is applied:
The design component is allocated a Specification Reference (SPREF) which is
selected from the required SPEC. You usually define the Pipe Specification (PSPEC)
as soon as you create a new pipe, and this is then applied to all components which the
Pipe owns unless you override it.
The SPREF points to an SPCOM (in the Catalogue DB).
The SPCOM points to a suitable catalogue component (COMP) via the CATREF
pointer.
(The SPCOM also points to a DTEXT via the DETAIL pointer, an MTEXT via the MATXT
pointer, a BLTAB element via the BLTREF pointer, and a CMPT element in a Properties DB
via the CMPREF pointer, as appropriate.) This is illustrated below.
12.0 3 2:6
Figure 2:5. The links between Design Data, Specifications and Catalogue
EXAMPLE:
As an illustration of the principles of the selection process, consider the following question
and answer sequence which might apply when choosing a valve from the /RF300
Specification represented in Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping
components:
SELEC_1 TYPE?
Answer VALV, which leads to the next question ...
SELEC_2 PBOR0?
Answer 25.0, which leads to a choice of three STYPs
SELEC_3 STYP?
Answer GA, which in this example offers only one choice for SHOP
SELEC_4 SHOP?
Answer TRUE
The resulting combination of SELEC answers, namely a 25mm bore Gate Valve with its
SHOP attribute set to TRUE, is represented in the SPEC by one, and only one, SPCOM,
namely */25GA. This points to the component in the Catalogue which completely matches
the specification, via the CATREF /VGAFF. The corresponding descriptive DTEXT is pointed
to by the DETAIL /DGA.V.SW, and so on. Note that the CATREF is unique within this SPEC,
whereas the same DETAIL applies to other components such as */20GA.
PIPE
COMPONENT
SPREF
SPEC
COMPONENT
DETAIL
MATXT
DTEXT
MTEXT
(SPCOM)
(PSPEC)
COMP
CATREF
BLTREF
BLTAB
CATALOGUE SPECIFICATIONS DESIGN DATA
CMPREF
CMPT
(PROPS DB)
via
SELECs
How To Use SPECON
3 How To Use SPECON
SPECON is used for all aspects of Specification creation, modification and interrogation.
This chapter explains how to carry out the following tasks:
Create a new SPEC (Creating a Specification)
Access an existing SPEC (Accessing an Existing Specification)
Input data (SELECs and SPCOMs) to a SPEC (Entering Tabular Data)
Edit an existing SPEC (Editing an Existing Specification)
Copy an existing SPEC as the basis for a new SPEC (Copying a Specification)
Output the contents of a SPEC to a selected device (Outputting a Specification)
Use macro input techniques to simplify SPECON usage (Using Macros For SPECON
Inputs)
3.1 Creating a Specification
To create a new SPEC, use one of the commands
NEW SPECification specname
NEW specname
where specname is the PDMS name which will be used to refer to the complete
Specification.
Note: The short form of the command is all that is necessary, since a SPEC is the only
element type which you can create at this level in SPECON (the lower level elements
SELEC and SPCOM are created indirectly when the tabular data is entered; see
Entering Tabular Data).
For example, either of the following commands:
NEWSPEC / RF300
NEW/ RF300
would create a new SPEC called /RF300.
To associate a descriptive text with the SPEC name, use the syntax
TEXT text
For example, the SPEC created in the preceding example might be given an associated text
by entering the command
TEXT 300 psi Pi pi ng Speci f i cat i on
(Note the delimiting apostrophes enclosing the text string, which must not exceed 50
characters.)
12.0 3 3:2
How To Use SPECON
This text, which is stored in a TEXT element in the hierarchy, will be shown after the SPEC
name when the Specification is output; see Outputting a Specification.
Two system attributes on the PDMS SPECIFICATION element are used when the product
VANTAGE Project Resource Management (VPRM) is the source of PDMS Specifications.
When a specification is imported to PDMS the attributes FISSUE and FINPUTBY hold the
VPRM information.
FISSUE holds VPRM issue number
FINPUTBY holds information indicating that the source was VPRM and includes the
date of issue
The system attribute FSTATUS also holds the VPRM status of the specification, usually
working or approved.
For example:
Fi nput by | VPRM at 26- NOV- 2003 12: 04|
Fi ssue | 00|
Fst at us | APPROVED|
3.2 Accessing an Existing Specification
Access a SPEC by using any of the following commands:
OLD SPECification specname
OLD specname
SPECification specname
specname
where specname is the name of an existing SPEC.
For example, enter any of the following commands:
OLD SPEC / RF300
OLD / RF300
SPEC / RF300
/ RF300
to access the SPEC created in Creating a Specification. Clearly, the simplest method is to
enter just the name of the SPEC required.
You may interrogate the SPWLD hierarchy by using the command, or change to a different
SPEC element within it by using any of the standard DB navigational commands such as
FIRST, NEXT, etc., in the usual way.
3.3 Entering Tabular Data
3.3.1 General Principles
You must have created or accessed a SPEC (as described in Creating a Specification and
Accessing an Existing Specification, respectively) before you can enter tabular data.
Each Specification may contain any number of separate tables. For example, that part of the
SPEC named /RF300 listed in Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping
How To Use SPECON
components contains four tables (one for each of the component types VALV, TEE, ELBO
and FLAN), although the complete SPEC would probably contain many more.A table
comprises three distinct types of data:
A Heading (or Question Line)
Defaults
Answer Lines
The heading must be at the top of the table; the defaults, if specified, must immediately
follow the heading; and the answer lines (one for each SPCOM) form the remainder. This
sequence is illustrated in Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components.
3.3.2 Special Characters in SPEC Data
In addition to conventional alphanumeric PDMS names and attribute values, the following
special characters may be used in the SPEC data entries:
* The star or asterisk character is used throughout PDMS as an abbreviation which you
can set to the name of an owning element when naming a member element in a DB
hierarchy. In most modules you must define this character by using the command, but it
is set automatically by SPECON so that it always refers to the name of the current
SPEC. For example, in the SPEC named /RF300 shown in Figure 2-4, the component
listed as */20GA has the full PDMS name /RF300/20GA.
+ The plus character means ditto; it enables you to repeat the setting above it in the
table with the minimum of keystrokes.
- The minus or dash character, which may be used only in the default line of a table,
means not applicable or unspecified. If a default line is present, this character must
appear under TYPE and NAME, and under any SELEC questions for which default
answers are not set. It must not appear under CATREF, DETAIL, MATXT etc., for which
defaults are never allowed.
= The equals character, when used in the default line of a table, means that the answer
will default to the first selector in list order after all other questions have been
answered.
As an example, consider the following part of a table (which incorporates all four of the
characters * - + and =):
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 STYP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
DEFAULTS
- - - =
FLAN */ FG 20. 0 S / FSAAPAPP / 20FL / ASA- 20F =0 / SBOL/ 20F
FLAN */ FX + P + + / ASA- 20FX =0 +
. . .
This includes two SPCOMs which differ only in the Selector STYP (Subtype) and which
have pointers, for the purpose of this example, to different Material Texts. When this SPEC
is used to select a component without specifying the required STYP, the =default option will
select the first SPCOM (*/FG) in the list order, which points to the MTEXT identified as /
ASA-20F.
Note: The equals signs within the body of the table, in the form =0, simply show that those
pointers have not been set. They have no relevance to the equals sign in a default
line.
Since PDMS does not allow any SPREF to exist more than once, items in a SPEC which
are identical but which need to be distinguished from each other may be allocated suffixes.
ISODRAFT can be made to ignore such a suffix by recognising the delimiting character
which separates the suffix from the rest of the SPREF. For example, if the delimiting
12.0 3 3:4
How To Use SPECON
character is defined as a colon (:), which is the default, ISODRAFT will identify two
components with the SPREFs /TEE.FS:AA and /TEE.FS:AB as having the same item code /
TEE.FS. See the ISODRAFT Reference Manual for further details, including the way in
which you may specify which character is to be recognised as the delimiter.
3.3.3 Headings
The heading line, which defines the column headings for the rest of the table, contains four
distinct sorts of information:
TYPE is the generic type (GTYPE) of the component represented by an SPCOM.
NAME is the unique identifier for each SPCOM.
Selector Questions define the SELEC choices which will be used to choose an
appropriate SPCOM for a given design purpose (e.g. STYPE, ANGLE etc.).
Reference Pointers link each SPCOM to the corresponding definitions in the other
parts of the Catalogue (e.g. CATREF points to a COMP, DETAIL points to a DTEXT,
and so on).
(For full details of the available options for Selector Questions and Reference Pointers, see
Selectors and Pointers for Piping Components, Selectors and Pointers for Structural
Components, or Selectors and Pointers for Insulation.)
To define a heading, use the command syntax
Heading
TYpe NAme questions pointers
noting that the command is entered on two lines (i.e. you must press RETURN after the
command HEADING, as well as after the last entry in the second heading line).
Note: When new data is entered into a Specification, the input sequence is TYPE NAME ...
etc.; when an existing Specification is modified (see Editing an Existing
Specification), or when its contents are output (see Outputting a Specification), the
corresponding sequence is NAME TYPE ... etc.Examples of possible commands for
defining headings are as follows:
For generic type TUBE -
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 SCHE SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
For generic type ELBO -
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 STYP ANGL SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
For generic type REDU -
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 PBOR2 STYP SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
For generic type BEAM -
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME STYP GRAD DEPT WI DT WEI G I NER CATREF
and so on. See Details of Typical Specifications for explanations of the SELEC questions
used in these headings.
The maximum number of entries in a heading line (that is, the maximum number of columns
in the table) is 20.
How To Use SPECON
Note: The number of columns in an existing Specification cannot be changed, so it is
important that you choose the headings carefully when you create a new
Specification.
3.3.4 Defaults
To define the default settings for the SELEC answers, use the command syntax
Defaults
default_settings
which, as with the HEADING command, occupies two input lines.
Each SELEC question column must be set to either a definite answer (value, word, etc.) or
to a - or =character (as defined in Special Characters in SPEC Data). The TYPE and NAME
columns must have - (null) defaults and the Reference Pointer columns must have no
default entries at all.
For example, heading and default lines for a table of VALV Specifications might be entered
as follows:
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 STYP SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF
BLTREF
DEFAULTS
- - - GATE =
Any VALV selected without specifying the STYPE (for example, by using the command
NEW VALV SEL in a design module) will have the word GATE assigned as the answer to
the SELEC question for its STYPE.
3.3.5 Selector Answers
To complete the main area of the table, enter the TYPE and NAME, followed by an
appropriate answer (value, word etc.) under each column heading, for each SPCOM line in
turn. The spacing between the answers is not critical, although interpretation of the SPEC
table may be easier if you align the headings and answers in vertical columns, as illustrated
in Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components. Note, however, that the
tabulation used when data in input to a SPEC is not retained when that SPEC is
subsequently output.
Remember that you can use the * and +characters, defined in Special Characters in SPEC
Data, to save repetitive typing when entering the SPEC data from a keyboard.
Note: You must take care not to use any of the dimensional units (MM, M, IN, FT, FE etc.)
in answers which are expected to be words. This applies particularly to the STYPE
Selector (see Subtype Selectors: A Special Case). If, for example, a Specification
included the adjacent headings PBOR0 STYPE and you entered the answers 25 for
the bore and FT for the STYPE, SPECON would interpret this as a bore of 25 feet
and would try to assign the next answer or reference pointer to the STYPE.
3.3.6 Subtype Selectors: A Special Case
Subtype (STYP or equivalent) selector answers can be tabulated in either of two formats: as
a PDMS word (up to four letters), or as a text string (of any length) enclosed between
apostrophes. If you use the latter format, you must precede the text string with the word
TEXT to avoid possible confusion with user-defined dimensioning units.
12.0 3 3:6
How To Use SPECON
For example, the STYP for a gate valve (generic type VALV) could be listed either as GATE
or as the equivalent form TEXT GATE. If these are to be truly equivalent, you must use
uppercase characters for GATE in the text answer. Alternatively, the text version could be
extended to give a more explicit description; for example, TEXT High Pressure Gate.
3.3.7 Including User-defined Attributes in Specifications
To include the settings of user-defined attributes in a Specification, for subsequent use by
ISODRAFT, use the command syntax
EXTRA :uda_name attribute_setting
For example:
EXTRA : col our gr een
( wher e : col our i s a uda of t ype t ext )
EXTRA : di agonal 226. 87
( wher e : di agonal i s a uda of t ype r eal )
User-defined attribute settings included in this way (one per line) will be correctly output and
re-input when you list the SPEC using macros. Note: User-defined attributes to be used in
this way must have been defined in LEXICON with SPCOMs as valid components.
3.3.8 Including Comments in Specifications
To include a comment in a Specification, typically to clarify details of its content for future
users, use the command syntax
COMMENT text
All text between apostrophes following the COMMENT command will be ignored when the
SPEC is interpreted, but will be correctly output and re-input when you list the SPEC using
macros.
3.4 Editing an Existing Specification
3.4.1 Adding a New SPCOM
To add one or more new SPCOM lines to an existing SPEC, use the same syntax as that
described in Entering Tabular Data for setting up a new SPEC; that is, enter the command
lines
Heading
TYpe NAme questions pointers
Defaults( opt i onal )
default_settings( opt i onal )
selector_answers pointer_settings
The heading line TYPE NAME questions pointers must be the same as the corresponding
line in the existing SPEC. SPCOMs entered in this way will be merged into the table for the
relevant component type when the SPEC is output.
3.4.2 Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM
The terminology used here is significant:
How To Use SPECON
If a SPEC or SPCOM is deleted, all aspects of it are eliminated from the Catalogue DB.
If an existing design includes a component with an SPREF which points to the deleted
data, any future access to the Design DB, say to produce a drawing, will result in an
error since no matching SPCOM will be found.
If a SPEC or SPCOM is removed, the data held within it is transferred to a special
archive Specification named /*LIMBOSPEC. The data still exists, so that references to
it are still valid, but it no longer forms part of the original named SPEC. This facility is
useful:
when a component is withdrawn from use for new designs but its continued use in
existing designs is permitted
when use of a component is to be suspended temporarily while modifications are
made.
Note: If you are using more than one Catalogue DB, there is one archive Specification for
each DB. This avoids inadvertent transfer of data between DBs due to removal and
subsequent restoration of SPECs or SPCOMs. Such multiple archive Specifications
are named /*LIMBOSPEC, /*LIMBOSPEC_1, /*LIMBOSPEC_2 etc. Only the single
form /*LIMBOSPEC will be referred to in the remainder of this manual.
To delete individual SPCOM lines from a SPEC, use the command syntax
DELETE spcom1 spcom2 ...
where spcom1, spcom2 etc. identify the relevant SPCOMs. For example,
/ RF300
DELETE */ 20GA */ 25GA
will access the SPEC /RF300 and delete the SPCOMs /RF300/20GA and /RF300/25GA.
To delete a complete Specification, use the command syntax
DELETE SPECification specname
where specname is the name of the SPEC. For example,
/ RF300
DELETE SPEC / RF300
will access and then delete the entire SPEC named /RF300.
To delete all SPCOMs from a SPEC without deleting the SPEC itself, enter the command
DELETE ALL
Note: The DELETE command should be used with care. No checks are made against any
design data before the SPCOMs are deleted and any references to such SPCOMs in
a Design DB will become invalid. If in doubt, use the REMOVE command.
To remove individual SPCOM lines from a SPEC, use the command syntax
REMove spcom1 spcom2 ...
where spcom1, spcom2 etc. identify the relevant SPCOMs.
The effect of this command is to remove all answers from the named SPCOM lines, except
for the pointers CATREF and DETAIL, and to transfer those SPCOMs to the archive
Specification /*LIMBOSPEC. If a Specification Reference (SPREF) in a Design DB points to
an SPCOM which cannot be found in the currently named SPEC, it will automatically look
for that SPCOM in /*LIMBOSPEC.
To remove the entire contents of a SPEC, enter the command
12.0 3 3:8
How To Use SPECON
REMove ALL
To reinstate a removed SPCOM, ensure that you are pointing to the correct current SPEC
and then use the syntax for modifying an SPCOM, as defined in Deleting or Removing a
SPEC or SPCOM, but incorporate the name of the SPCOM to be reinstated. The SPCOM
will automatically be moved back from /*LIMBOSPEC into the original SPEC.
3.5 Copying a Specification
It is sometimes necessary to have two SPECs which are very similar, perhaps differing only
in the CATREF and DETAIL pointers of their member SPCOMs. To enable you to create
these easily, SPECON allows you to make a copy of an existing SPEC which you can then
rename and edit as required. To do so, use the command syntax
COPY specname REName name1 name2
where specname identifies the complete SPEC which is to be copied and name1 and
name2 define the old and new name parts, respectively, for the individual SPCOM lines
throughout the SPEC. In most cases name1 will be the same as specname.
For example, to create a new Specification /SPEC2 derived from an existing and similar
Specification /SPEC1, enter the commands
NEWSPEC / SPEC2
COPY / SPEC1 RENAME / SPEC1 / SPEC2
/SPEC2 will contain exactly the same headings, default settings and SPCOM lines as /
SPEC1 except that all SPCOMs which were named /SPEC1/... in the latter will have been
renamed /SPEC2/... in the former.
You can now change any individual answers (attribute settings or pointers) in /SPEC2 by
using the editing commands described in Editing an Existing Specification.
3.6 Outputting a Specification
3.6.1 Defining the Destination
You can output the content of a SPEC to your terminal or to a file (perhaps for subsequent
printing). The device to which SPECON is to send the output may be defined by using the
standard device-selection commands described in the PDMS MONITOR Reference
Manual. The default is TERMINAL.
3.6.2 Outputting Complete Specifications
To output one or more complete SPECs, use the command syntax
OUTput specname1 specname2 ...
For example, to send the content of Specification /RF300 to a file named /RF300.SPEC in
your current OS directory, enter the commands
FI LE / RF300. SPEC
OUTPUT / RF300
How To Use SPECON
The data will be output to the selected device in a similar tabular format to that in which it
was entered into the SPEC, although the precise tabulation settings will have been modified
to suit the linewidth of the destination device (but see also Controlling the Output Format).
SPEC data output in this way has the same NAME TYPE ... sequence as that which applies
when existing data is being accessed for editing; not the TYPE NAME ... sequence in which
it was entered. To output a SPEC with the heading sequence TYPE NAME ... (to be used,
for example, as input at a later time; see Using Macros For SPECON Inputs), use the
extended command syntax
OUTput NEW specname1 specname2
(The default version of the OUTPUT command is equivalent to OUTPUT OLD, but there is
no advantage in using the longer form.)
3.6.3 Controlling the Output Format
By default, the tabulated layout of data derived the output macro is the same as that in the
original SPEC. You can compact the output macro file by replacing multiple spaces by a
single space. This saves disk space, but can make the tables more difficult to read. To do
so, use the command
COMPact
To restore the tabulated format with aligned columns, use the command
ALIGned
3.6.4 Outputting Parts of Specifications
To generate output which is restricted to one or more specified types of component, include
the generic types of the required components by using one of the syntax formats
OUTput gtype1 gtype2 ... specname1 specname2 ...
OUTput OLD gtype1 gtype2 ... specname1 specname2 ...
OUTput NEW gtype1 gtype2 ... specname1 specname2 ...
where gtype1, gtype2 etc. are the component types to be included and specname1,
specname2 etc. are the Specifications from which the data is to be extracted.
For example, to create a file containing just the valve and flange data from the Specification
/RF300, in a format suitable for use as input to a different Specification, you might use the
commands
FI LE / SPECDATA
OUTPUT NEWVALV FLAN / RF300
3.6.5 How Bores Are Output
Although all pipe bores are stored in the PDMS databases in mm, they may be input and
output in either metric or imperial units. The program converts from one set of units to the
other by applying the factor 25.4 mm/inch.
PDMS holds tables of standard nominal bore pipe sizes and, unless specified otherwise,
compares each actual bore against the values in the appropriate (metric or imperial) table. If
the actual bore falls within a predefined tolerance of one of the nominal bores, it is assumed
that the standard sized pipe is suitable and so that nominal bore is output.
12.0 3 3:10
How To Use SPECON
You may specify whether component bores within the Specification data are to be output as
actual or nominal sizes by using the command syntax
BOREs ACTual
BOREs NOMinal
The default is BORES NOMINAL.
Note: RADI and HEIG questions use the current Distance unit.
Nominal Pipe Size Tables contains the tables used by PDMS to define metric and imperial
pipe sizes.
3.7 Using Macros For SPECON Inputs
While it is possible to create or modify SPECs and SPCOMs interactively, it is usually more
efficient to use macros for this purpose.
The tabular format of the SPECON input is easily achieved using any normal text editor and
the data file thus created can be checked for errors before it is read into the Catalogue DB.
If any syntax errors are found when the macro file is run in SPECON, the file may be edited
to correct the mistakes and rerun with the minimum amount of effort.
The format of the macro input file is exactly the same as that produced by the OUTPUT
NEW command described in Outputting Complete Specifications; that is, TYPE must
precede NAME in the heading and SPCOM lines. This means that Specifications which
have been sent to a file may be edited independently of PDMS, using any available text
editor in your computer system, and then reloaded via SPECON. This is often the most
effective way of carrying out major revisions of existing SPECs. Any part of an SPCOM line
may be changed in this way other than the NAME or TYPE; if these were changed SPECON
would not be able to locate the SPCOM to overwrite it.
Remember, when creating SPECON input macros from the keyboard, that the symbols *
(automatically set to the Specification Name) and +(equivalent to ditto) can be used to save
repetitive typing (see Special Characters in SPEC Data).
To update an existing macro to use text strings instead of PDMS words for STYPE selector
answers (see Subtype Selectors: A Special Case), edit the macro so that each four-
character word representing an STYP (or equivalent) is replaced by the keyword TEXT
followed by the replacement text enclosed between apostrophes. For example, you would
replace GATE by TEXT GATE. Note that the text must be in uppercase characters if it is
to be interpreted in the same way as the equivalent PDMS word.
Details of Typical Specifications
4 Details of Typical Specifications
This chapter explains, with examples, typical data entries which might be used in
Specifications for the main types of design components (piping components, structural
components and insulation).
4.1 Selectors and Pointers for Piping Components
4.1.1 Applicability
The headings in this section may apply to components from the following list of GTYPEs:
ATTAchment
NOZZle
Bend OLEts
Bolt PCLamp
CAP PCOmp
CLOsure REDucer
COUpling ROD
CROSs SCLamp
DUCting SHU
Elbow TEE
FBLind TUBe
FILter TRAP
FLAnge UNIon
FLG VALve
FTUbe VENt
GASket VFWay
HELement VTWay
12.0 3 4:2
(For Insulation, see Pipework Insulation)
4.1.2 Selectors
There are very few constraints on the SELEC questions, and the order in which you list
them, when defining SPECs for piping components. The following headings should meet
most of your requirements:
Pbore integer
Specifies the bore of p-point integer. For multiway components (such as a Tee), more
than one PBORE SELEC may be specified (PBORE1, PBORE2 etc.).
PConn integer
Specifies the connection type of p-point integer.
Note: See P-Point Zero: A Special Case for important information about the use of the
special cases PBORE0 and PCONN0 which may be applied to the preceding
SELECs.
SType
Defines the Specific Type of the component; it is effectively a subdivision of a GTYPE.
For example, a component of GTYPE VALV may have an STYPE GATE, GLOB,
CHEC etc.
ANGle
Defines the required angle of an ELBO or BEND, when DDANGL has been used in
the component pointset (PTSET). The answer to this SELEC question in an SPCOM
may be a single value (e.g. 90.0) or a range of values (e.g. 45.0,90.0).
RADius
Defines the required radius of an ELBO or BEND, when DDRADI has been used in
the component pointset (PTSET). May be a single value or a range.
TEMperature
Defines the operating temperature.
PRessure
Defines the operating pressure.
RATing
Defines the pressure rating.
SHOP
Defines whether the component is intended for shop fabrication (SPCOM answer
TRUE or SHOP) or on-site assembly (SPCOM answer FALSE or SITE).
In addition to the standard SELEC headings, you may use any word (up to four letters), with
or without a numeric qualifier, to define your own questions. For example, if you wished to
INSTrument WELD
LJ SE
ATTAchment
include a range of colour-coded reducers in your Catalogue (perhaps having a base colour
and a marker colour to indicate suitability for particular types of use), you might include the
questions COL1 and COL2 as SELEC headings in the Specification for TYPE REDU. The
SPCOMs containing the answers to these questions will be considered by the selection
process if the appropriate option is specified in your design module command; for example
SELECT NEWREDU . . . WI TH COL1 RED WI TH COL2 BLUE
If COL1 and/or COL2 are omitted, the default colours (answers) will be used.
4.1.3 P-Point Zero: A Special Case
Normally, when the bore or connection type of a p-point is used as a SELEC question, the
answer provided will apply to a specific p-point number. For example, PBORE1 will be the
components arrive bore, PBORE2 will be its in-line leave bore, and so on. However, under
some circumstances this need not apply. In such cases you may use the Selectors PBORE0
and/or PCONN0 to represent either the arrive or leave p-point of the component.
For example, assume that you wish to select a flange. Normally P1 would represent p-arrive
and P2 would represent p-leave, so that the Selector PBORE1 could be matched against
the p-leave bore of the preceding component to select a suitable flange. If, however, the
flange is reversed (flipped), P2 becomes the p-arrive and so a Specification based on the
Selector PBORE1 will not allocate a correct match.
If the SELEC is defined as PBORE0, all p-points of the new component will be tested, in
numeric order, against the p-leave of the preceding component. Thus, in the case of our
flipped flange, if a P1 match cannot be found then P2 will be tested as a second choice. If
either P1 or P2 matches the answer given for PBORE0, then a flange will be selected.
The same principle applies to the connector type PCONN0.
You will find the P-point Zero convention very useful when compiling Specifications. Figure
2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components, for example, illustrates the use of
PBORE0 (abbreviated to PBOR0) for four component types.
4.1.4 Reference Pointers and Settings
The following reference pointers and settings are applicable to the specification of piping
components (see the examples below).
Individual Specification Component Pointers
These pointers, which are attributes of SPCOM elements, are set individually for each line in
a Specification table. Only the CATREF pointer is obligatory; the other pointers may be
omitted from the heading when the Specification is created or they may be left as unset (=0)
in individual SPCOM lines.
CATREF - Catalogue Reference:
Points to one particular component in the Catalogue DB which meets all the SELEC
requirements specified for an individual SPCOM. A CATREF heading is obligatory for every
SPEC table since it is the essential link between the design specification and the choice of a
component from the Catalogue. It is important that the component pointed to by the
CATREF already exists when the SPCOM is defined, otherwise you will receive the error
message Undefined Name and the CATREF in the Specification will be shown as =0 (i.e.
unset).
DETAIL - Detail Text:
12.0 3 4:4
Points to a DTEXT element in the Catalogue DB. This holds any general text which is
used to describe the corresponding component in schedules, on isometric drawings,
etc. (see the PARAGON Reference Manual).
MATXT - Material Text:
Points to an MTEXT element in the Catalogue DB. This holds the text which is used to
describe the materials of construction of the corresponding component in schedules, on
isometric drawings, etc. (see the PARAGON and ISODRAFT Reference Manuals).
BLTREF - Bolt Reference:
Points to a BLTAB element in the Catalogue DB. This contains details of the bolts
needed to connect the corresponding component into a pipeline (see the ISODRAFT
Reference Manual). This heading is, of course, applicable only to components which
require bolts (flanges etc.).
CMPREF - Component Reference:
Points to a CMPT element in the Properties DB (see the PROPCON Reference
Manual).
Overall Specification Pointers
These pointers, which are attributes of SPEC elements, are set for an entire Specification.
Their settings are shown at the beginning of the Specification, immediately after the name,
and always appear, even if they remain unset.
MATREF - Material Reference:
Points to a SOLID element in the Properties DB. This holds information about the
properties of the materials of construction of the piping components (see the
PROPCON Reference Manual).
FLUREF - Fluid Reference:
Points to a FLUID element in the Properties DB. This holds information about the
properties of the liquids or gases for use with which the piping components are
suitable (see the PROPCON Reference Manual).
Overall Specification Settings
These are not pointers to other elements but are local to the Specification itself. Their
settings are shown at the beginning of the Specification, immediately after the MATREF and
FLUREF pointers, and always appear, having default settings if you have not specified
otherwise. These attribute settings are used only by ISODRAFT and are relevant only when
fixed length piping is being used. You are referred to the section entitled Fixed Length
Piping in the ISODRAFT Reference Manual for fuller details.
RATING - Pipeline Pressure Rating:
May be set to the maximum pressure at which the components covered by the
Specification are intended for service. ISODRAFT can then use this setting to
determine those points in a composite pipeline at which the pressure rating changes.
The default setting is zero.
LINETYPE - Fixed Length Piping Line Type:
May be set to either of the identifiers
FP - Fixed Pipe
FX - Fixed Length
ISODRAFT uses this setting to decide whether or not to append the length of a component
to its item code in a material list. The length is appended if linetype is set to FP, but is
assumed to be incorporated into the standard code if linetype is set to FX. The default
setting is NUL (i.e. variable length piping between components is assumed).
4.1.5 Examples From Piping Component Specifications
To keep the examples brief, very few lines (SPCOMs) are shown for each GTYPE.
NEWSPECI FI CATI ON / RF300
MATREF =0
FLUREF =0
RATI NG 0. 000
LI NETYPE NUL
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
- - - =
TUBE */ 20TU 20. 0 TRUE / TUEE / DTUB1 / MTUB =0 =0
TUBE */ 25TU 25. 0 TRUE / TUFF / DTUB1 / MTUB =0 =0
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 STYP SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
- - - PE =
FTUB */ 20FT 20. 0 PE TRUE / FTEE / DFTUB / MFTUB =0 =0
FTUB */ 25FT 25. 0 PE TRUE / FTFF / DFTUB / MFTUB =0 =0
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 RADI ANGL SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
- - - - = =
BEND */ 20VB1 20. 0 100. 0 90. 0 TRUE / VBEE / DVBEND1 / MVBEND =0 =0
BEND */ 20VB3 20. 0 100. 0 180. 0 TRUE / BEEE / DBEND1 / MVBEND =0 =0
BEND */ 20VB2 20. 0 60. 0 90. 0 TRUE / VBEE / DVBEND2 / MVBEND =0 =0
BEND */ 20VB4 20. 0 60. 0 180. 0 TRUE / BEEE / DBEND2 / MVBEND =0 =0
BEND */ 25VB1 25. 0 125. 0 90. 0 TRUE / VBFF / DVBEND1 / MVBEND =0 =0
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR0 CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
GASK */ 20G 20. 0 / GAEE / DGASK / MGASK =0 =0
GASK */ 25G 25. 0 / GAFF / DGASK / MGASK =0 =0
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME PBOR1 PBOR2 STYPE SHOP CATREF DETAI L MATXT CMPREF BLTREF
- - - - CONC =
REDU */ 25RC1 25. 0 20. 0 CONC TRUE / RCFE / DRED. C / MRED =0 =0
REDU */ 25RE1 25. 0 20. 0 ECC TRUE / REFE / DRED. E / MRED =0 =0
REDU */ 32RC1 32. 0 25. 0 CONC TRUE / RCGF / DRED. C / MRED =0 =0
REDU */ 32RE1 32. 0 25. 0 ECC TRUE / REGF / DRED. E / MRED =0 =0
. . .
and so on.
(See Figure 2:4.: Part of a typical Specification for piping components for some other
examples.)
4.2 Selectors and Pointers for Structural Components
4.2.1 Applicability
The headings within this section may apply to components from the following list of
GTYPEs:
12.0 3 4:6
BASE
BEAM
BRACe
COLUmn
FITTing
GANTry
GIRDer
J OINt
J OISt
KNEE
PILE
PROFile
PURLin
RIDGe
ROD
SCTN
SDRAil
SPLIce
STANchion
STIFfener
STRUt
TIE
4.2.2 Selectors
The following SELEC questions are those which you are likely to use when defining SPECs
for structural components:
SType
Defines the Specific Type of the component; particularly applicable to the general
generic types PROF, J OIN and FITT. Examples of STYPE answers which might be
applied to structural components to cover European, American and British standards
include:
STYPE Meaning
C Channel section or American standard Cshapes (tapered flanges)
CHS Circular hollow section
CRSJ Castellated rolled steel joists
CUB Castellated universal beams
CUC Castellated universal columns
CZB Castellated Zbeams
EAI Imperial equal angles
EAM Metric equal angles
HD European columns (wide flanges)
HE European beams (wide flanges)
DEPth
The depth (height) of a structural section; e.g. 100 mm.
WIDth
The width of a structural section; e.g. 100 mm.
WEIGht
The weight per unit length; e.g. 100 kg/m.
DIMEnsion integer:
Any dimension. The qualifying integer is optional; suggested conventions are:
DIME1
Depth or long leg
DIME2
Width or short leg
HL/HX European beams (very wide flanges)
HP Bearing piles (wide flanges)
IPE European beams (parallel faced flanges)
IPN European standard beams (tapered flanges)
LST Long stalk teebars
M/W American Ishapes (wide flanges)
RHS Rectangular hollow section
RSJ Rolled steel joists
S American standard Ishapes (tapered flanges)
T Tee bars
TUB Tees cut from universal beams
TUC Tees cut from universal columns
U European small channels
UB Universal beams
UBP Universal bearing piles
UC Universal columns
UEAI Imperial unequal angles
UEAM Metric unequal angles
UPN European standard channels
PLAT Plate girders
STYPE Meaning
12.0 3 4:8
CTYPE integer
A connection type. The qualifying integer is optional; suggested conventions are:
CTYPE1
Start connection
CTYPE2
End connection
CTYPE3
Attached connection
CTYPE4
Owning connection
with the possible answers RIVET, BOLT, WELD, GLUE etc.
CTYStart
Start connection (equivalent to CTYPE1).
CTYEnd
End connection (equivalent to CTYPE2).
CTYAttached
Attached connection (equivalent to CTYPE3).
CTYOwning
Owning connection (equivalent to CTYPE4).
INERtia integer
Moment of inertia about a specified axis; e.g. 280 cm$. (It is usually convenient to use
cm rather than mm here to avoid having to list large values.) The qualifying integer is
optional; suggested conventions are:
INER1
Inertia about x-x
INER2
Inertia about y-y
INER3
Inertia about u-u
INER4
Inertia about v-v
THICkness integer
Plate thickness within a section; e.g. 10 mm. The qualifying integer is optional;
suggested conventions are:
THIC1
Web thickness
THIC2
Flange thickness
FIXty
J oint fixity; e.g. FIXED, PINNED, PLASTIC, HINGED, RIGID etc.
GRADe
Material grade for fire-resistant insulation; e.g. 43. (See Structural Insulation.)
FIREsistance
Degree of fire resistance for insulation; e.g. 2 hr. (See Structural Insulation.)
ITHIckness
Insulation thickness; e.g. 50 mm. (See Structural Insulation.)
AREA
Area of a section; e.g. 100 cm.
As for piping component specifications, you may also use any word, with or without a
numeric qualifier, to define your own questions. See Selectors.
4.2.3 Reference Pointers and Settings
The pointers and attribute settings which you may specify for structural component
specifications are the same as those defined in Reference Pointers and Settings for piping
components, although the relative importance of the references will differ (for example,
FLUREF, RATING and LINETYPE are unlikely to be relevant). As for piping components,
only the CATREF pointer is obligatory.
4.2.4 Examples From Structural Component Specifications
The following excerpt from a Specification for structural steelwork components illustrates
some of the features defined in the preceding sections:
Note: The Reference Pointers DETAIL, MATXT, CMPREF and BLTREF have been omitted
to save space. Although these are available to give consistency with Piping
Specifications, you are unlikely to use these for structural components (BLTREF, in
particular, would have no meaning for a structural component). No defaults have
been set in this example.
NEWSPECI FI CATI ON / BS4. PT1
MATREF =0
FLUREF =0
RATI NG 0. 000
LI NETYPE NUL
TEXT Mi ddl esbr ough Mi l l s
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME STYP GRADE WI DTH DEPTH WEI GHT I NERTI A CATREF
BEAM */ UB1 UB 43 465 153 82 32435 / 457X152X82UB
+ */ UB2 + 50 465 153 82 32435 / 457X152X82UB
+ */ UB3 + 43 310 125 48 9504 / 305X127X48UB
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME STYP GRADE DEPTH WI DTH WEI GHT I NERTI A CATREF
BRAC */ UEA1 UEAM 43 200 150 47 2376 / 200X150X18L
+ */ UEA2 + 50 200 150 47 2376 / 200X150X18L
+ */ UEA3 + 43 125 75 18 354 / 125X75X12L
. . .
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME STYP WI DTH DEPTH WEI GHT I NER1 I NER2 CATREF
PROF */ BS. C1 C 102. 0 432. 0 65. 5 21399. 0 628. 6 / 432X102X65KG. C
+ */ BS. C2 + 102. 0 381. 0 55. 1 14894. 0 579. 8 / 381X102X55KG. C
. . .
PROF */ BS. CRSJ 1 CRSJ 102. 0 305. 0 25. 3 5372. 0 162. 5 / 305X102X25KG. CRSJ
12.0 3 4:10
+ */ BS. CRSJ 2 + 102. 0 267. 0 21. 5 3562. 0 139. 1 / 267X102X21KG. CRSJ
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME STYP DEPT WI DT WEI G I NER1 I NER2 CATREF
PROF */ BS. CUB1 CUB 1371. 0 419. 0 388. 0 1661103. 0 42443. 0 /
1371X419X388KG. CUB
+ */ BS. CUB2 CUB 1371. 0 419. 0 343. 0 1449837. 0 36223. 0 / 1371X419X343KG. CUB
. . .
and so on.
4.3 Selectors and Pointers for Insulation
The information given in this section applies specifically to the generic type INSulation.
4.3.1 Pipework Insulation
You do not select and store Insulation in the same way that you select piping components
from other modules. The Insulation Specification is interrogated automatically by modules
such as DESIGN each time insulation details are required. When setting up an Insulation
Specification you must follow a strict format if this automatic selection is to work properly.
For any specific insulation material, the correct insulation thickness for a given pipework
application is usually derived from two Selector questions:
TEMPerature:
The working temperature; usually specified as a temperature range (e.g. 101,200)
PBOR0:
The nominal diameter of the component; usually specified as a range of bore sizes
(e.g 1, 2 using inch bores or 25,70 using metric bores)
These might be related to the available thicknesses in the following way:
where the bores and insulation thickness are defined in inches. It is assumed in this
example that the minimum insulation thickness which can be handled conveniently is 1 inch
and so this has been applied to all pipe sizes in the low temperature range (0 to 100
degrees).
This data would result in an Insulation Specification of the following form:
NEWSPEC / I NSPEC
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME TEMP PBOR0 CATREF DETAI L
I NSU */ I N1 0, 100 1, 8 / I C1 / CAL. SI L
I NSU */ I N2 101, 200 1, 2. 5 / I C1 / CAL. SI L
I NSU */ I N3 101, 200 3, 8 / I C1. 5 / CAL. SI L
I NSU */ I N4 201, 400 1, 2. 5 / I C2 / CAL. SI L
Temperature Range Bore Range Insulation Thicknes
101 - 200
1 - 2
1
/2
1
101 - 200 3 - 8
1
1
/2
201 - 400
1 - 2
1
/2
2
201 - 400 3 - 8 3
0 - 100 1 - 8 1
I NSU */ I N5 201, 400 3, 8 / I C3 / CAL. SI L
Note: Because of possible ambiguity due to the overlapping ranges of PBOR0, the order in
which the SELEC headings are tabulated is important. For the successful selection
of Insulation the TEMP question must be tabulated before the PBOR0 question.
4.3.2 Structural Insulation
Insulation for Sections, J oints and Fittings may be selected from an Insulation Specification
by using the selection criteria Grade, Fire Resistance and Insulation Thickness derived from
the current component. An extract from a typical Insulation Specification for use in structural
design might be as follows:
NEWSPECI FI CATI ON / BS4. PT1. I NSUL
HEADI NG
TYPE NAME GRADE FI RE I THI CATREF
DEFAULTS
- - 43 - -
I NSU */ I N1 43 1, 2 20 / I N25
+ */ I N2 40 1, 2 40 / I N50
+ */ I N3 43 2, 4 20 / I N50
+ */ I N4 50 2, 4 40 / I N75
+ */ I N5 43 4, 10 20 / I N75
+ */ I N6 50 4, 10 40 / I N100
12.0 3 4:12
Command Syntax Diagrams
A Command Syntax Diagrams
A.1 Introduction
This appendix contains the legal command and interrogation syntax diagrams relevant to
the PDMS SPECON module. These diagrams formalise the precise command sequences
which may be used and are intended to supplement the explanations given in the
appropriate sections of this manual.
A.2 Conventions
The following conventions apply to the syntax diagrams in this appendix:
All diagrams have abbreviated names. Such names are composed of lowercase letters
enclosed in angled brackets, e.g. <gid>. These short names, which are used for
cross-referencing purposes in the text and within other syntax diagrams, are
supplemented by fuller descriptions where they are not self-explanatory.
Commands to be input from the terminal are shown in a combination of uppercase and
lowercase letters. In general, these commands can be abbreviated; the capital letters
indicate the minimum permissible abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed
in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase
and lowercase letters.
For example, the command
REMove
may be input in any of the following forms:
REM
REMO
REMOV
REMOVE
Commands shown wholly in uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
Names written in lowercase italics are command arguments (see Nominal Pipe Size
Tables).
Syntax diagrams are generally read from top left to bottom right.
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. Thus
>- - +- - ABC - - - - .
| |
| - - PQR - - - - |
12.0 3 A:2
| |
| - - <di a> - - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - +- - >
means you may type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia>or just press RETURN to get the default option.
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. Thus
. - - - - - <- - - - - .
/ |
>- - *- - opt i on1 - - |
| |
| - - opt i on2 - - |
| |
- - opt i on3 - - +- - >
permits any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3 to be used (where the
options may define commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments). This may
form an exception to the rule of reading from top left to bottom right.
The simplified format
. - - - <- - - - .
/ |
>- - *- - name - - +- - >
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
A.3 Command Arguments
These are inputs which are necessary to qualify command words. They are distinguished by
appearing in italics.
Name Definition Example
name PDMS element name /ABCDE
refno PDMS reference number =23/1403
integer a positive integer 0, 3
value signed number 3.142, -23.66, -34
word alphabetic word NULL, VALV (4 chars. max.)
text alphanumeric string Enclose Between Apostrophes
sign plus or minus character +(for ditto); - (in default lines)
equals equals character =(in default lines)
comma comma character 20, 40 (for range of values)
nl new line Press the RETURN key
A.4 Syntax Diagrams
The diagrams are listed approximately in the order in which they are described in this
manual.
A.4.1 <speca>
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - - *- - - NEW- - - +- - - SPECi f i cat i on - - - . |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - OLD - - - +- - - SPECi f i cat i on - - - . |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + |
| | |
| - - - SPECi f i cat i on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - <i d> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <t abl e> - - - > |
| |
| - - - REMove - - - . . - - - - <- - - - - . |
| | / | |
| - - - DELETE - - - +- - - *- - - <i d> - - - +- - - - . |
| | | |
| | - - - ALL - - - - - - - - - - - - - | |
| | | |
| - - - SPECi f i cat i on - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TEXT - - - text - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - OUTput - - - +- - - NEW- - - . |
| | | |
| | - - - OLD - - - | . - - - - - <- - - - - - - . |
| | | / | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - *- - - <gt ype> - - - . - - - - <- - - - - . |
| | / | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - *- - - <i d> - - - +- - - |
| |
| - - - COMPact - - - . |
| | |
| - - - ALI Gned - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <copy> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - MATRef - - - . |
| | |
| - - - FLURef - - - +- - - <i d> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RATI ng - - - value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - LI NETYpe - - - word - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - - BOREs - - - +- - - ACTual - - - - . |
| | |
- - - NOMi nal - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
A.4.2 <table>
. - - - - - - - - <- - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - - <headi ng> - - - *- - - <def aul t > - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <l i nesp> - - - - - -
|
- - - >
12.0 3 A:4
A.4.3 <heading>
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - - Headi ng - nl - - +- - TYpe - NAme - - . . - - *- - - PBor e - - - integer - - - - - - - |
| | | | |
- - NAme - TYpe - - +- - | - - - PConn - - - integer - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SType - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - ANGl e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RADi us - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TEMper at ur e - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - PRessur e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RATi ng - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SHOP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CATr ef - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DETai l - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - MATXt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CMPr ef - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - BLTr ef - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DEPt h - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WI Dt h - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CTYSt ar t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CTYEnd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CTYAt t ached - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CTYOwni ng - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FI Xt y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - GRADe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FI REsi st ance - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - I THI ckness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - AREA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WEI Ght - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DI MEnsi on - - - . |
| | |
| - - - CTYPE - - - - - - - | |
| | |
| - - - I NERt i a - - - - - | |
| | |
| - - - THI Ckness - - - | |
| | |
| - - - word - - - - - - - - +- - value - - |
| | |
- - - - > - - - - - - - - - - -
A.4.4 <default>
. - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
>- - - Def aul t s - - - nl - - - sign - - - sign - - - *- - - <uval > - - - |
| |
| - - - sign - - - - - |
| |
| - - - word - - - - - |
| |
| - - - equals - - -
|
- - - >
A.4.5 <linesp>
>- - +- - - noun - - - .
| |
| - - - sign - - - - +- - - name - - - - - .
| |
- - - <i d> - - - +- - - noun - - - - - |
| |
| - - - sign - - - - - | . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| | / |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - *- - - word - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TEXT - - - text - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - EXTRA - - - : uda_name - - - uda_setting - - - |
| |
| - - - COMMENT - - - text - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <uval > - - - +- - - comma - - - <uval > - - - - . |
| | | |
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - |
| |
| - - - sign - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - <i d> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
|
- - - >
A.4.6 <id>
>- - - - +- - - name - - - .
| |
- - - refno - - - +- - - >
A.4.7 <copy>
>- - - COPY - - - <i d> - - - - +- - - REName - - - name - - - name - - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - ><uval >
>- - - +- - - value - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
- - - <expr essi on> - - - +- - - EXponent i al - - - value - - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - MM - - - - - - - .
| |
| - - - Met r es - - - |
| |
| - - - I Nches - - - |
| |
| - - - FT - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FEet - - - - - |
| |
| - - - text - - - - - |
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
12.0 3 A:6
A.5 Other PDMS Command Syntax
Common commands which may be legally used from within SPECON, but which are not
directly related to this module, include the following:
Function(s) Syntax Diagram Name
Actions setting (i.e. ACTIONS command) <actset>
Element identification and database navigation <gid>and its subsidiary syntax
Device control <devvic>
Date and time (real & elapsed) <klok>and <datxtr>
Querying specific options:
Actions <qact>
eading banner <qbann>
Buffers <qbuff>
Input/output device <qdevc>
Input/output counters <qioc>
Project details <qproj>
Defining the current (default) units of measurement <setun>
Attribute type references <satt>
Module selection <smodu>
Giving system commands <syscom>
Defining logical expressions etc. <pml>
Error Messages
B Error Messages
The following is a list of those error messages specific to SPECON. All such error messages
have a message number beginning with 17. Any other messages that may be output are not
described here as they are not specific to SPECON.
Note: Since some other modules access the Specifications directly during their normal
functioning (for example, to select insulation data) you may receive SPECON error
messages while working in those modules.
(17:2) Cannot access ID
The element specified does not appear to exist in this DB. Check that you have entered
the identifier correctly.
(17:3) Cannot access SPECIFICATION
Check that you have entered the identifier for the SPEC correctly.
(17:4) Cannot create SPCOM or SELEC
You can only add a new SPCOM line or SELEC question after you have created a new
SPEC or have accessed an existing SPEC (see Creating a Specification to Entering
Tabular Data).
(17:5) Cannot create SPECIFICATION
You can only create a new SPEC as a member of a Specification World (SPWLD) element
in a CATALOGUE DB. Check your current position in the hierarchy. (See Catalogue DB
and Content and Format of a Specification.) An accompanying message should give a
fuller explanation.
(17:6) CATREF already used in heading
You have specified two CATREF pointers in a heading line. The second entry will be
ignored, but should preferably be deleted.
(17:7) Answers select previously defined spcom
The combination of answers listed for this SPCOM line leads to an SPCOM which has
already been defined. The second SPCOM line will, therefore, never be reached during
the selection process.
(17:9) DB unsuitable for SPEC
You can only create a new SPEC as a member of a Specification World (SPWLD) element
in a CATALOGUE DB (see Catalogue DB and Content and Format of a Specification).
12.0 3 B:2
Error Messages
(17:10) DITTO IN FIRST LINE
The ditto symbol (+) means repeat the corresponding entry in the preceding line and is
therefore only valid in the second or subsequent lines of the table.
(17:11) No SPECIFICATION defined
You must have created a new SPEC or accessed an existing SPEC before you can add to,
modify, or output any tabulated Specification data (see How To Use SPECON).
(17:12) ID name/refno does not correspond to column heading
An element identifier in an SPCOM line must correspond to a relevant Reference Pointer
in the heading line. It cannot be given as an answer under a SELEC question in the
heading (see How Component Selection Works).
(17:13) ID is not a SPEC
The identifier given in an OUTPUT command must refer to an accessible SPEC (see
Outputting a Specification). Check that you have entered the identifier correctly.
(17:14) Too many headings for output
You cannot output more than 20 headings in a table.
(17:15) More answers than questions - extra answers ignored
You have more entries in an SPCOM answer line than you have corresponding entries in
the heading line. Check for unintentional spaces.
(17:16) More defaults than questions - extra defaults ignored
You have more entries in the defaults line than you have corresponding entries in the
heading line.
(17:17) More than 20 HEADINGS
The maximum number of entries permitted in a heading line is 20.
(17:18) DETAIL already used in heading
You have specified two DETAIL pointers in a heading line. The line will be ignored.
(17:19) Name already defined. Name/refno will remain unnamed.
The NAME specified for this SPCOM has already been used and so this second SPCOM
line will have only its PDMS refno as its identifier. Redefine this line with a new NAME if
required.
(17:20) No. of QUESTIONS and ANSWERS do not match up
If the answers in a given SPCOM line do not correspond in a relevant way with the SELEC
questions in the heading then that SPCOM will be ignored. (See the Note in Selector
Answers for one possible cause of this problem.)
(17:22) Reserve name /*LIMBOSPEC has been used - object with
this name has been unnamed
The Specification /*LIMBOSPEC is reserved for holding REMOVED SPCOMs (see
Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM). You cannot use it for any other purpose.
Error Messages
(17:23) SPCOM does not exist
Check that you have entered the SPCOM identifier correctly when modifying an existing
Specification.
(17:24) SPEC does not exist
Check that you have entered the SPEC identifier correctly.
(17:26) This command only allowed in SPEC
You can only use a DELETE or REMOVE command after you have accessed an
appropriate SPEC (see Accessing an Existing Specification and Deleting or Removing a
SPEC or SPCOM), otherwise SPECON does not know which Specification you are telling
it to modify.
(17:28) TYPE required as first answer
When adding a new SPCOM you must enter its TYPE (a PDMS noun) before its NAME.
You may only use the reverse order when referring to an existing SPCOM (see Entering
Tabular Data).
(17:29) Unable to create TEXT element
You can only specify one string of descriptive text for each SPEC.
(17:30) Unable to put CATREF
You are unable to set this Reference Pointer to the element specified. Possibly you have
specified it incorrectly.
(17:33) Undefined name
Check that you have entered the required identifier correctly.
(17:34) SPEC or an offspring is locked.
The SPEC is protected against modification. Use the UNLOCK command before trying to
use any of the SPECON editing facilities.
(17:35) SPEC is not empty
When using the COPY command, the SPEC into which the copy is transferred (name1 in
Copying a Specification) must be empty. You cannot concatenate SPECs with the COPY
command.
(17:36) ID must be SPCOM
The REMOVE command can only be used to remove SPCOMs. You cannot remove an
entire SPEC, although you may use the REMOVE ALL option to empty it of its contents
(see Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM).
(17:38) No databases to work from
(17:39) No SPEC database
The specified MDB does not contain an appropriate CATALOGUE DB in which SPECON
can create SPECs.
(17:40) TEXT longer than 50 characters
12.0 3 B:4
Error Messages
The text associated with a SPEC cannot exceed 50 characters in length (see Creating a
Specification).
(17:41) Unable to put CMPREF
(17:42) Unable to put DETAIL
(17:43) Unable to put MATXT
(17:44) Unable to put BLTREF
(17:45) You may not delete /*LIMBOSPEC
The SPEC named /*LIMBOSPEC, used to hold removed SPCOMs, is created
automatically by PDMS and cannot be deleted, otherwise future REMOVE commands
would not work (see Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM).
(17:46) You cannot REMOVE SPEC - use REMOVE ALL
The REMOVE command applies only to the contents of a SPEC. Use REMOVE ALL to
empty the SPEC of all contents or DELETE SPEC specname to eliminate the complete
SPEC. (See Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM.)
(17:47) You cannot REMOVE items from /*LIMBOSPEC
The REMOVE command can only transfer SPCOMs to /*LIMBOSPEC. Only by re-entering
an SPCOM under its existing name can it be transferred back from /*LIMBOSPEC into a
user-defined SPEC. (See Deleting or Removing a SPEC or SPCOM.)
(17:48) MATXT already used in heading
You have specified two MATXT pointers in a heading line. The second entry will be
(17:49) CMPREF already used in heading
You have specified two CMPREF pointers in a heading line. The second entry will be
(17:50) BLTREF already used in heading
You have specified two BLTREF pointers in a heading line. The second entry will be
(17:51) SPCON NAME name already exists
You must use a unique name for each SPCON. The new SPCON will be rejected.
Error Messages
(17:52) word is not valid as a GTYPE
See Applicability for examples of valid GTYPEs.
(17:53) TMPR already used in heading
You have specified two TMPR pointers in a heading line. The second entry will be ignored,
but should preferably be deleted.
(17:54) Unable to put TMPR
12.0 3 B:6
Error Messages
SPECON Reference Manual
Nominal Pipe Size Tables
PDMS 12.0 C:1 AVEVA Solutions Ltd 1993-2007
C Nominal Pipe Size Tables
As explained in Outputting Parts of Specifications, PDMS holds tables of nominal pipe sizes
which it uses in preference to actual sizes if an actual and a nominal size fall within a
predefined tolerance band. These tables comprise the following diameters:
Metric Units Imperial Units Metric Units Imperial Units
(mm) (inches (mm) (inches)
6. 0 0. 125 900. 0 36. 0
8. 0 0. 250 950. 0 38. 0
10. 0 0. 375 1000. 0 40. 0
15. 0 0. 500 1050. 0 42. 0
20. 0 0. 750 1100. 0 44. 0
25. 0 1. 00 1150. 0 46. 0
32. 0 1. 25 1200. 0 48. 0
40. 0 1. 50 1250. 0 50. 0
50. 0 2. 00 1300. 0 52. 0
65. 0 2. 50 1350. 0 54. 0
80. 0 3. 00 1400. 0 56. 0
0. 0 3. 50 1450. 0 58. 0
100. 0 4. 00 1500. 0 60. 0
125. 0 5. 00 1600. 0 64. 0
150. 0 6. 00 1650. 0 66. 0
200. 0 8. 00 1750. 0 68. 0
250. 0 10. 0 1800. 0 72. 0
300. 0 12. 0 1850. 0 74. 0
350. 0 14. 0 1900. 0 76. 0
400. 0 16. 0 1950. 0 78. 0
450. 0 18. 0 2000. 0 80. 0
500. 0 20. 0 2050. 0 82. 0
550. 0 22. 0 2100. 0 84. 0
600. 0 24. 0 2200. 0 88. 0
650. 0 26. 0 2400. 0 96. 0
700. 0 28. 0 2600. 0 104. 0
750. 0 30. 0 2800. 0 152. 0
800. 0 32. 0 3000. 0 120. 0
850. 0 34. 0 3200. 0 128. 0
3400. 0 136. 0
3600. 0 136. 0
3800. 0 1
4000. 0 136. 0
PDMS 12.0 C:2
SPECON Reference Manual
Nominal Pipe Size Tables
AVEVA Solutions Ltd 1993-2007
PROPCON
General Description
The PDMS PROPCON (PROPerties CONstructor) module is used to input and edit data
within the Properties database (DB).
Properties data was initially used by PDMS to hold those properties of components and
materials which may be needed for stress analysis or safety auditing of all or part of a
design. In recent versions its use has been extended to include data such as the material
densities needed by the DESIGN structural applications for calculating weights and centres
of gravity of steelwork items.
PROPCON uses the general constructor syntax, as found in DESIGN, PARAGON, etc., but
the principal commands are repeated in this manual for convenience.
12.0 4 1:2
General Description
Properties Data
2 Properties Data
2.1 Setting Up a Properties Database
A Properties database (DB) is created in the ADMIN module in the same way as a Design or
Catalogue DB. The DB will be assigned, typically, to the team responsible for pipe stressing.
The syntax for creating a Properties DB is:
>- - CReat e - - DB - - teamname/dbname - - PROP - - >
Before the Properties DB can be used, it must be added to a multiple database (MDB).
2.2 Description
Full details of the Properties database structure and of the elements held within it are shown
in Appendix B. The types of data stored may be grouped into the following categories:
2.2.1 Design Layout Data
A full description of the geometry and fitting of pipework is needed. This already exists in the
Design DB.
2.2.2 Material Property Data
This consists of expansion coefficients, Youngs modulus of elasticity etc., for each material.
This includes the actual pipe material, such as steel, and the fluid, such as water, which the
pipe contains.
2.2.3 Case Data
Case data consists of the particular values of temperature and pressure that can be applied
to a pipe at any one time. A pipe may have several cases if the temperature and/or
pressure parameters vary.
2.2.4 Component Data
The Catalogue does not give extensive information on components, only size attributes. The
Properties DB component data element can be referenced from individual specification
components and consists of physical data, such as weight, flexibility factors, wall thickness,
etc.
12.0 4 2:2
Properties Data
2.2.5 Constraint Data
This constraint data is split between the Properties DB and the Design DB. In the Design
DB, an attachment point is created having a reference attribute which points to a constraint
in the Properties DB. This constraint has data referring to forces, moments etc.
2.2.6 Run Data
This is the information needed to carry out a run that is not held elsewhere in PDMS and
could consist of a header card, for instance, which would contain a persons name and the
type of analysis to be performed. This run data will depend on the type of stressing package
interfaced to the Properties DB.
2.3 Material Property Data
2.3.1 Hierarchy Description
The Material World (MATW) comes below World in the Properties hierarchy. It is purely an
administrative element that groups material data together.
Below MATW are two elements: SOLI and FLUI. The material properties are subdivided
such that SOLI holds data for the pipe itself and FLUI holds data for the fluid within the pipe.
2.3.2 Material Properties
The pipework material properties associated with flexibility and stress analysis are as
follows:
POI SSON S RATI O
COEFFI CI ENT OF EXPANSI ON
YOUNG S MODULUS
ALLOWABLE STRESS
DENSI TY
There can also be three general properties known as A, B and C properties. These are used
to store any additional properties that may be needed. Each of these may be a function of
temperature and/or pressure.
To enable the properties to be stored against temperature and pressure values, the data is
stored in a tabular format which incorporates a table element for each type of property:
TYOU (table of Youngs modulus values), TSTR (table of allowable stresses), etc.
Below these are spot elements, SYOU, SSTR etc. The spot elements have attributes
PRES and TEMP where values of pressure and temperature may be input. Each element
also has an attribute to allow the input of the corresponding value of its own property; for
example, SYOU has an attribute YOUN where a value of Youngs modulus may be stored,
SAPR has an attribute APRO where a value of APROPERTY may be stored, and so on.
At different temperatures and pressures, the value of Youngs modulus may vary, and so
more spot Youngs modulus elements (SYOUs) may be created with different temperature,
Properties Data
pressure and Youngs modulus values. Thus the attributes settings for a specific SYOU
might be:
The table that these spot properties create can then be used by a suitable stressing
package. The table effectively forms a graph with the spot property, temperature and
pressure. From this table, therefore, the stressing package can interpolate other values it
may need.
The PDMS unit for TEMP is degrees centigrade and for PRES and YOUN is N/m
2
.
Therefore, this material at a temperature of 20 degrees centigrade and a pressure of 101
kN/m
2
would have a value for Youngs modulus (E) of 210 GN/m
2
. For a change of units,
see Use of Groups.
Note: FLUI does not have the elements relating to allowable stress, nor Poisson's ratio, i.e.
TSTR, TPOI, SSTR and SPOI.
The elements SOLI and FLUI have an attribute DESC (Description) which is a 120-
character text string.
The table elements (TPOI, TEXP etc) have an attribute PQUA (Property Qualifier) which is
some qualification under which the property applies. There is provision for 4 characters.
The table elements also have an attribute SREF (Source Reference). This may be the name
of a book from where the spot values were obtained and is a 12-character text string.
The elements TAPR, TBPR and TCPR also have an attribute PNAM (Property Name) which
is a 12-character text string.
At the same level as the table elements is an element TEXT which has an attribute STEX
which is a 50-character text string.
2.3.3 Pointers from the Design DB and Specification
The Specification Component (SPCOM) has attributes MATR and FLUR. These are
material reference and fluid reference, which point to the pipe material (SOLI) and the fluid
within the pipe (FLUI), respectively.
In the Design DB, Pipes and Branches also have these attributes MATR and FLUR. If these
are set, the references from the Specification Component are ignored, but if they are unset,
the references from the Specification Component are used.
TYPE SYOU (Spot Youngs modulus)
NAME
LOCK
OWNE
TEMP 20 (Temperature)
PRES 101EX+3 (Pressure)
YOUN 210EX+9 (Youngs modulus value; see Exponential Numbers for a
description of the exponential format of numbers)
12.0 4 2:4
Properties Data
2.4 Case Data
The Case World (CASWL) is a member of World in the Properties hierarchy and is an
administrative element used to keep all Case data together.
Below CASWL come two elements, Case (CASE) and Case Type (CAST). CASE may be
directly below CASWL or may come under CAST.
CAST is an administrative element to further group cases if there are several of them and
they can be split into case types.
A Case has of a number of attributes which describe different conditions to which a pipe is
subjected. For every run of a pipe there may be a number of cases.
CASE has the following attributes:
The attributes WEFA, WPRE, WIFA, IPRE, RPRE, PTEM, RTEM and TGRA are all real
numbers; SHOC is a 3-element real array; APPL is a 20-character text string.
2.4.2 Pointer from the Design DB
The elements Pipe and Branch in the Design DB have an attribute Case Reference (CASR)
which points to a Group of Cases applicable for that pipe in the Properties DB. The use of
Groups for Cases is described in Use of Groups.
TYPE CASE
NAME
LOCK
OWNE
WEFA (weight factor)
WPRE (wind pressure)
WI FA (wind factor)
I PRE (internal pressure)
RPRE (reference pressure)
PTEM (pipe temperature)
RTEM (reference temperature)
TGRA (temperature gradient)
SHOC (shock load vector)
APPL (application)
Properties Data
2.5 Component Data
The Component World (CMPWL) is a member of World in the Properties hierarchy. It is an
administrative element to keep component data together. Below CMPWL there is
Component Type (CMPT), which is also a purely administrative element. Under CMPT can
be found Component Data (CMPD) and Tube Data (TUBD).
Insufficient data is held in the Catalogue and Design DBs about components for a stressing
run to take place. Therefore further data can be stored as attributes of CMPD or TUBD.
CMPD has the following attributes:
TYPE CMPD
NAME
LOCK
OWNE
OUTD (outside diameter)
ACBO (actual bore)
BTOL (bore tolerance)
WTOL (weight tolerance)
CWEI (component weight)
CI WE (component insulation weight)
WDI A (wind diameter)
SHAP (shape factor)
RI NE (rotational inertia vector)
SI F (stress intensification factor)
PRFC (pressure factor)
SDTH (saddle thickness)
CORA (corrosion allowance)
EFAC (Youngs modulus factor)
BFLE (bend flexibility)
DFFL (displacement force flexibility)
DMFL (displacement moment flexibility)
RMFL (rotational moment flexibility)
MRKR (component marker)
12.0 4 2:6
Properties Data
The element TUBD has the same attributes, except that it does not have DFFL, DMFL or
RMFL and, instead of having CWEI and CIWE, it has UWEI, which is weight per unit length
(unit weight), and UIWE, which is weight per unit insulation.
The attributes OUTD, ACBO, BTOL, WTOL, CWEI, CIWE, WDIA, SHAP, PRFC, CORA,
EFAC, PWAS, BFLE and MRKR are real numbers; RINE, SIF and SDTH are 3-element real
arrays; DFFL, DMFL and RMFL are six- and nine-figure flexibility matrices.
To enable Weight and Centre of Gravity calculations to be performed in all disciplines, the
CWEI and UWEI attributes have been updated to use parameterised properties, i.e. they
can be set using standard expression syntax such as:
( wei ght ( ATTRI B PARA[ 2] + ATTRI B PARA[ 3] )
Existing syntax is still valid, for example:
UWEI 2. 5
The rest of the real number attributes (other than MRKR) have also been parameterised.
2.5.2 Querying Calculated Results
The pseudo-attribute PROPRE is provided to allow the querying of the calculated result of a
property attribute. This is a valid attribute at the design element which indirectly references
the property component such as a pipe or branch. This attribute has a qualifier, which is the
property attribute to be evaluated, for example:
Q PROPRE OUTD
2.5.3 Pointer from the Specification
The Specification Component (SPCOM) has a reference to the Component Data or Tube
Data relevant to that particular component. This reference is called CMPR (Component
Reference).
2.6 Constraints Data
The Constraint World (CONW) is a member of World. It owns Constraint Type (CONT),
which is an administrative element that groups constraint data into types. Below CONT is
Constraint (CONS). This element has attributes that store particular conditions to which a
constraint may be subjected.
CONS owns the Case Table element (TCAS). This is a reference to a particular case for
which the constraint data is applicable.
One constraint may own more than one TCAS. This could mean that the attribute of
constraint is valid for more than one case (for different temperatures and pressures etc.).
If there is no TCAS, then this could mean that the attributes of CONS are valid for any
particular case.
Properties Data
CONS has the following attributes:
The attribute APPL (application) is a 20-character text string; FORC, MOME, DISP, ROTA,
FLIM, MLIM, DFLF, RFLF, FCOE, CPUL and CPUT are 3-element real arrays; DLIM and
RLIM are 6-element real arrays.
The element CONT has an attribute RTYP (Restraint Type) which is a 12-character text
string.
The element TCAS (Case Table element) has an attribute CASR (Case Reference) which
references a case applicable for that constraint.
2.6.2 Pointer from the Design DB
In the Design DB, Pipe has a legal member called ATTA (Attachment Point). This element
has an attribute CSTR (Constraint Reference) which points to a constraint in the Properties
DB, and therefore to all its attributes and conditions.
TYPE CONS
NAME
LOCK
OWNER
APPL (application)
FORC (applied force (load))
MOME (applied moment)
DI SP (applied displacement)
ROTA (applied rotation)
DLI M (displacement limits)
RLI M (rotation limits)
FLI M (force limits)
MLI M (moment limits)
DFLF (translational flexibility factor - distance/force)
RFLF (rotation flexibility factor)
FCOE (friction coefficient)
CPUL (cold pull (translational))
CPUT (cold pull (twist))
12.0 4 2:8
Properties Data
2.7 Run Data
The Run World (RUNW) is a member of World and owns the element RUN. RUN is a text
element with an attribute DATE, which is a 9-character text string, and UNAME (User
Name), which is a 12-character text string. RUN owns Card (CARD) which has attributes
Card Type (CATY) and Card Text (CTXT), which is a 120-character text string.
These text attributes are used to store information necessary to run a specific stress
analysis package, e.g. a header card containing a persons name, type of analysis to be
performed, etc.
Some General Commands
3 Some General Commands
3.1 Introduction
The following commands are common to most PDMS constructor modules.
A brief description of them is given in this manual, but for a more detailed description see
the PDMS DESIGN Reference Manual.
CLOCK
COPY
DELETE
END
GOTO
INCLUDE
LOCK
NAME
NEW
OLD
QUERY
RENAME
REORDER
SAME
UNLOCK
UNNAME
Reference Numbers
Exit fromPROPCON
3.2 CLOCK Command
The CLOCK syntax is available, as in all constructor modules.
>- - - CLOCK - - - +- - - I NI Ti al i se - - . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| | / |
- - - READ - - - - - - - - *- - - ELapsed - - . |
| | |
| - - - CPU - - - - - - | |
| | |
| - - - PAGi ng - - - +- - - -
|
| - - ALL - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - | - - TI MEs - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - +- - nl - - >
12.0 4 3:2
3.3 COPY Command
Elements may be copied using the COPY command.
The basic command form is:
>- - - COPY - - - <gi d> - - - >
This copies the attributes of element <gid>into the Current Element (which must be the
same as element <gid>) and duplicates any offspring of element <gid>.
3.4 DELETE Command
Elements are deleted using the DELETE command (for deletion of groups, see Use of
Groups).
The simplest command form is
>- - - DELETE - - - noun - - - >
which deletes the Current Element and all its members and removes its reference from its
owner list.
After deletion, the owner of the Current Element becomes the Current Element.
>- - - DELETE - - - noun - - - MEMber s - - - >
will delete all the members of noun and any offspring members, but not noun itself.
3.5 END Command
The END command makes the owner of the Current Element the new Current Element.
3.6 GOTO Command
Wherever an element has a reference to another element, the command GOTO may be
used instead of typing the reference elements name explicitly.
For example, the element TCAS has an attribute CASR (Case Reference).
The referenced Case may be accessed by typing the Case name, but can also be accessed
by:
GOTO CASR
3.7 INCLUDE Command
Moving an element from one list to another is done using the INCLUDE command:
>- - - I NCl ude - - - <gi d> - - - +- - - BEFor e - - - .
| |
| - - - AFTer - - - - +- - - <gi d> - - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
Because the INCLUDE command could cause problems if used between two DBs in an
MDB, its use has been restricted to operating only within one DB in an MBD.
3.8 LOCK Command
To prevent any accidental deletion of elements, they may be locked; under these conditions,
they cannot be modified in any way.
The Current Element may be locked using:
>- - - LOCK - - - >
Sometimes it may be desirable to lock the Current Elements offspring as well as itself. This
may be done using:
>- - - LOCK - - - ALL - - - >
3.9 NAME Command
An element may be named by
>- - - NEW- - - noun - - - name - - - >
but can be set or changed by
>- - - NAME - - - name - - - >
Note: All PDMS names must have a slash (/) as a prefix.
3.10 NEW Command
Elements are created using the NEW command. The simplest command form is:
>- - - NEW- - - noun - - - >
An element of type noun is created and inserted in the Current List immediately after the
Current List Position and becomes the new Current Element (noun must be a legal member
type of the Current Element).
It is possible to add a name and/or attributes after the NEW command on the same line, or
they may be input as separate lines.
For example:
NEW TUBD / ABC OUTD 120
( name) ( at t r i but e)
3.11 OLD Command
The OLD command can be used to ensure that, when accessing an element, it is of the type
required, e.g.
OLD TUBD / XYZ
If element /XYZ is not a TUBD, then the following message appears:
I NCORRECT TYPE OF ELEMENT
- LI NE ABORTED
In other words, because /XYZ is not a TUBD, /XYZ has not become the Current Element
and the Current Element remains as it was.
12.0 4 3:4
3.12 QUERY Command
Any attribute of any element may be queried using the QUERY command. All the attributes
of an element may be queried using
>- - - Quer y - - - ATTr i but es - - - >
but some may not be in a readable form and may need to be queried independently.
Members of an element may be queried by:
>- - - Quer y - - - MEMber s - - - >
For a full list of what can be interrogated using the QUERY command, see the <quera>
graph in Appendix A.
3.13 RENAME Command
The RENAME command may be used when copying elements with members to save time
having to name the copies later. This can only be used effectively if all the elements have
been named with one part of their name common to all elements, e.g.
CAST / C1
member s CASE / C1/ 1
CASE / C1/ 2
CASE / C1/ 3
CASE / C1/ 4
The /C1 part of the name is present in all elements.
If the CAST is to be copied, the following syntax may be used:
NEW CAST COPY / C1 RENAME / C1 / C2
This will copy the CAST and its members and where /C1 occurs in the name it will be
replaced with /C2, giving
CAST / C2
member s CASE / C2/ 1
CASE / C2/ 2
CASE / C2/ 3
CASE / C2/ 4
This will be the new CAST and its case members with the same attributes as /C1 but named
/C2.
3.14 REORDER Command
The order of elements within the Current List may be changed using the REORDER
command:
>- - - REOr der - - - <gi d> - - - +- - - BEFor e - - - .
| |
- - - AFTer - - - - +- - - <gi d> - - - >
The first element specified is positioned before or after the list position of the second
element.
3.15 SAME Command
The SAME command makes the previous Current Element the new Current Element
(previous in time, not list position); that is, it cancels the effect of the most recent change of
Current Element.
3.16 UNLOCK Command
Elements may be unlocked using:
>- - - UNLOck - - +- - ALL - - - .
| |
- - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
3.17 UNNAME Command
An element can be unnamed, i.e. its name removed, leaving only the PDMS system
reference number, by:
>- - - UNName - - - >
3.18 Reference Numbers
Every element created within PDMS is automatically given a system reference number such
as:
=83/ 201
Elements can be identified by this and/or their user-definable name. It is not essential to
define a name, but this usually aids easy operation.
3.19 Exit from PROPCON
It is possible to exit from PROPCON by typing either MONITor or any other PDMS module
name. This will update the database with any new data created or deleted and will then
change to the named module.
If the database is not to be updated, exit from PROPCON by typing
QUI T modul e_name
12.0 4 3:6
Use of Groups
4 Use of Groups
Groups are used in PROPCON to group Cases together. This is done to save space and
time spent creating Cases. Several Cases with the same attributes may be reproduced in
different Case Types if groups are not used.
The syntax for adding or removing cases from a group is:
>- - - +- - - ADD - - - - - - . . - - - - - - - - - - - .
| | / |
- - - REMOVE - - - +- - - <gi d> - - - *- - - <gi d> - - -
|
- - - - - >
Note: Do not delete cases from a group or you will delete them from the Properties
database. Use the REMOVE syntax
The element Group has an attribute FUNC (Function) which is a 12-character text string.
12.0 4 4:2
Use of Groups
Exponential Numbers
5 Exponential Numbers
Exponential numbers may be input into PROPCON with the following syntax:
>- - - at t r i but e - - - val ue - - - EXponent i al - - - exponent _val ue - - - >
For example:
YOUN 210 EX 9
means that the value of Youngs modulus input is 210 x 10
9
.
Values may be input non-exponentially subject to a maximum number of 11 digits. Use of
the EX command allows larger numbers to be input, depending on the particular machine
used.
Negative exponential numbers may be input, if required, by using a minus sign. The default
is positive.
PROPCON will output numbers in exponential format if the number is large enough or small
enough.
12.0 4 5:2
Exponential Numbers
PROPCON Syntax Graphs
A PROPCON Syntax Graphs
A.1 Introduction
This appendix contains the legal command and interrogation syntax graphs applicable to
the PDMS PROPCON module.
A.2 Conventions
The following conventions apply to the syntax graph presentation:
Graphs of primary importance are listed first. The remaining graphs are listed in
alphabetical order.
All graphs are individually identified by name. Names are composed of alphabetic
characters written in lowercase and enclosed between angled brackets, e.g. <gid>.
Commands to be input are written in a mixture of uppercase and lowercase letters
when the commands can be abbreviated. The uppercase letters define the minimum
permissible abbreviation.
e. g. TERmi nal
This command may be input as:
TER, TERM, TERMI , up t o t he f ul l compl ement of char act er s.
Graphs are normally read from top left to bottom right. Any junction (as shown below)
allows you to input any of the commands to the right of the junction:
>- - - +- - - A - - - - .
| |
| - - - B - - - - |
| |
- - - C - - - - +- - - >
When a loop back is included in the graphs, the command(s) in the loop may be
repeated as required.
. - - - - - - - - - - - - .
/ |
- - *- - - <gi d> - - - -
|
- - - nl - - - - - - - - - - >
12.0 4 A:2
A.3 Command Arguments
A.4 The PROPCON Syntax Graphs
<sadj>
>- - - +- - - <wat t > - - - - - - - - wor d - - - .
| |
| - - - DESCr i pt i on - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - SREFer ence - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - PNAMe - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - APPLi cat i on - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - RTYPe - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - UNAMe - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - STEXt - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - FUNCt i on - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
| - - - DATe - - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - |
| |
- - - CTXT - - - - - - - - - - t ext - - - - +- - - >
<satt>
>- - - +- - - OWNer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
| - - - TEMPer at ur e - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - PRESsur e - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DENSi t y - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - STREss - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - POI Ssons - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - EXPAnsi on - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
Name Definition Example
nl newline carriage return
name name /ABCDE
refno reference number =23/1403
val value -31529
word alphabetic word DESI
text text string Enclose in apostrophes
sign +or - +
| - - - YOUNgs - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - APROper t y - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - BPROper t y - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CPROper t y - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RTEMper at ur e - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RPREssur e - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WEFAct or - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WPREssur e - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WI FAct or - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - I PREssur e - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RPREssur e - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - PTEMper at ur e - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TGRAdi ent - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SHOCkl oad - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - OUTDi amet er - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - ACBOr e - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - BTOLer ance - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WTOLer ance - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - UWEI ght - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - UI WEi ght - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - WDI Amet er - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SHAPe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RI NEr t i a - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SI F - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - PRFC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SDTHi ckness - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CORAl l owance - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - EFACt or - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DFLFact or s - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FORCe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - MOMEnt - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DI SPl acement - - - - - - - |
| |
12.0 4 A:4
| - - - ROTAt i on - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DLI Mi t - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RLI Mi t - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FLI Mi t - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - MLI Mi t - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DFFLexi bi l i t y - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FCOEf f i ci ent - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CPULl - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CASRef er ence - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CATYpe - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CTXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DMFLexi bi l i t y - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RMFLexi bi l i t y - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CPUTwi st - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RFLFact or s - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - BFLExi bi l i t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CWEI ght - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CI WEi ght - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - - PWASt age - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
<snoun>
>- - - +- - - MATWor l ds - - - - - - - - .
| |
| - - - SOLI ds - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FLUI ds - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TDENsi t y - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TDENsi t i es - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TSTResses - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TPOI ssons - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TEXPansi ons - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TYOungs - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TAPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TAPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TBPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TBPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TCPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TCPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SDENsi t y - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SDENsi t i es - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SSTResses - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SPOI ssons - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SEXPansi ons - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SYOUngs - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SAPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SAPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SBPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SBPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SCPRoper t y - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SCPRoper t i es - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CASWor l ds - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CASEs - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CMPWor l ds - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CMPTypes - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CMPDat a - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CONWor l ds - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CONTypes - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CONSt r ai nt s - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TCASes - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RUNWor l ds - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RUNdecks - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CARDs - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TEXt s - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - CASTypes - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - TUBDat as - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - - GPWLds - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
12.0 4 A:6
<squer>
>- - - +- - - CTXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
| |
| - - - <wat t > - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - DESCr i pt i on - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - SREFer ence - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - PNAMe - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - APPLi cat i on - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - RTYPe - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - UNAMe - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - STEXt - - - - - - - - - - - - |
| |
| - - - FUNCt i on - - - - - - - - - |
| |
- - - DATe - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
<watt>
>- - - - +- - - PQUAl i f i er - - - - - .
| |
- - - MRKR - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - >
Properties Database Elements
B Properties Database Elements
B.1 Properties Database Hierarchy
The Properties DB hierarchy is as follows:
THIS DIAGRAM NEEDS EDITING/REDRAWING
B.2 Database Elements
CMPD
GPWL CASH RUNW MATW CMPW CONW
WORLD
GROU RUN
CMPT CONT
CASE CARD CONS
CASE
CAST SOLI FLUI
CONS
CASE TUBD TCAS
TCAS
TDEN TSTR TPOI TEXP TYOU TAPR TBPR TCPR TEXT TDEN TEXP TYOU TAPR TBPR TCPR TEXT
SDEN SSTR SPOI SEXP SYOU SAPR SBPR SCPR SDEN SEXP SYOU SAPR SBPR SCPR
1. Material World
2. Solid
3. Fluid
4. Table of Density
5. Table of Stress
6. Table of Poissons Ratio
12.0 4 B:2
The default values of each attribute, if any, are shown in the following lists.
7. Table of Coefficient of Expansion
8. Table of Youngs Modulus
9. Table of A Property
10. Table of B Property
11. Table of C Property
12. Text
13. Spot Density
14. Spot Stress
15. Spot Poissons Ratio
16. Spot Coefficient of Expansion
17. Spot Youngs Modulus
18. Spot A Property
19. Spot B Property
20. Spot C Property
21. Case World
22. Case Type
23. Case
24. Component World
25. Component Type
26. Component Data
27. Tube Data
28. Constraint World
29. Constraint Type
30. Constraint
31. Table of Cases
32. Run World
33. Run
34. Card
35. Group World
36. Group
B.3 Attributes of Material Data Elements
B.3.1 Material World (MATW)
TYPE MATW
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Owner s: WORLD
Legal Member s: SOLI , FLUI
B.3.2 Solid (SOLI)
TYPE SOLI
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
DESC
Legal Owner s: MATW
Legal Member s: TDEN, TSTR, TPOI , TEXP, TYOU, TAPR, TBPR,
TCPR, TEXT
B.3.3 Fluid (FLUI)
TYPE FLUI
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
DESC
Legal Owner s: MATW
Legal Member s: TDEN, TEXP, TYOU, TAPR, TBPR, TCPR, TEXT
B.3.4 Table of Density (TDEN)
TYPE TDEN
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Owner s: SOLI , FLUI
Legal Member s: SDEN
B.3.5 Table of Stress (TSTR)
TYPE TSTR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Owner s: SOLI
Legal Member s: SSTR
12.0 4 B:4
B.3.6 Table of Poissons Ratio (TPOI)
TYPE TPOI
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Owner s: SOLI
Legal Member s: SPOI
B.3.7 Table of Coefficient of Expansion (TEXP)
TYPE TEXP
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Member s: SEXP
B.3.8 Table of Youngs Modulus (TYOU)
TYPE TYOU
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Member s: SYOU
B.3.9 Table of A Property (TAPR)
TYPE TAPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PNAM
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Member s: SAPR
B.3.10 Table of B Property (TBPR)
TYPE TBPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PNAM
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Member s: SBPR
B.3.11 Table of C Property (TCPR)
TYPE TCPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
PNAM
PQUA 0. 00
SREF
Legal Member s: SCPR
B.3.12 Text (TEXT)
TYPE TEXT
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
STEX
Legal Member s: None
B.3.13 Spot Density (SDEN)
TYPE SDEN
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
DENS 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TDEN
B.3.14 Spot Stress (SSTR)
TYPE SSTR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
STRE 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TSTR
B.3.15 Spot Poissons Ratio (SPOI)
TYPE SPOI
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
POI S 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TPOI
12.0 4 B:6
B.3.16 Spot Coefficient of Expansion (SEXP)
TYPE SEXP
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
EXPA 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TEXP
B.3.17 Spot Youngs Modulus (SYOU)
TYPE SYOU
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
YOUN 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TYOU
B.3.18 Spot A Property (SAPR)
TYPE SAPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
APRO 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TAPR
B.3.19 Spot B Property (SBPR)
TYPE SBPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
BPRO 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TBPR
B.3.20 Spot C Property (SCPR)
TYPE SCPR
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
TEMP - 100000. 00
PRES - 100000. 00
CPRO 0. 00
Legal Owner s: TCPR
B.4 Attributes of Case Data Elements
B.4.1 Case World (CASW)
TYPE CASW
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Member s: CAST, CASE
B.4.2 Case Type (CAST)
TYPE CAST
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Owner s: CASW
Legal Member s: CASE
B.4.3 Case (CASE)
TYPE CASE
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
WEFA 0. 00
WPRE 0. 00
WI FA 0. 00
I PRE - 100000. 00
RPRE 0. 00
PTEM - 100000. 00
RTEM 0. 00
TGRA 0. 00
SHOC 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
APPL
Legal Owner s: CASW, CAST
B.5 Attributes of Component Data Elements
B.5.1 Component World (CMPW)
TYPE CMPW
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
12.0 4 B:8
Legal Member s: CMPT
B.5.2 Component Type (CMPT)
TYPE CMPT
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Owner s: CMPW
Legal Member s: CMPD, TUBD
B.5.3 Component Data (CMPD)
TYPE CMPD
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
OUTD 0. 00
ACBO 0. 00
BTOL 0. 00
WTOL 0. 00
CWEI 0. 00
CI WE 0. 00
WDI A 0. 00
SHAP 1. 00
RI NE 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
SI F 1. 00 1. 00 1. 00
PRFC 1. 00
SDTH 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
CORA 0. 00
EFAC 1. 00
BFLE - 100000. 00
DFFL 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
DMFL 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
RMFL 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
MRKR 0. 00
Legal Owner s: CMPT
B.5.4 Tube Data (TUBD)
TYPE TUBD
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
OUTD 0. 00
ACBO 0. 00
BTOL 0. 00
WTOL 0. 00
UWEI 0. 00
UI WE 0. 00
WDI A 0. 00
SHAP 1. 00
RI NE 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
SI F 1. 00 1. 00 1. 00
PRFC 1. 00
SDTH 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
CORA 0. 00
EFAC 1. 00
PWAS 0. 00
BFLE - 100000. 00
MRKR 0. 00
Legal Owner s: CMPT
B.6 Attributes of Constraint Data Elements
B.6.1 Constraint World (CONW)
TYPE CONW
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Member s: CONT, CONS
B.6.2 Constraint Type (CONT)
TYPE CONT
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
RTYP
Legal Owner s: CONW
Legal Member s: CONS
B.6.3 Constraint (CONS)
TYPE CONS
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
APPL
FORC 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
MOME 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
DI SP 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
ROTA 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
DLI M 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
RLI M 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
FLI M 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
MLI M 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
DFLF - 100000. 00 - 100000. 00 - 100000. 00
RFLF - 100000. 00 - 100000. 00 - 100000. 00
FCOE 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
CPUL 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
12.0 4 B:10
CPUT 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
Legal Owner s: CONW, CONT
Legal Member s: TCAS
B.6.4 Case Table Element (TCAS)
TYPE TCAS
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
CASR =0
Legal Owner s: CONS
B.7 Attributes of Run Data Elements
B.7.1 Run World (RUNW)
TYPE RUNW
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Member s: RUN
B.7.2 Run (RUN)
TYPE RUN
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
DATE
UNAM
Legal Owner s: RUNW
Legal Member s: CARD
B.7.3 Card (CARD)
TYPE CARD
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
CATY 0
CTXT
Legal Owner s: RUN
B.8 Attributes of Group Elements
B.8.1 Group World (GPWL)
TYPE GPWL
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
Legal Member s: GROU
B.8.2 Group (GROU)
TYPE GROU
NAME
LOCK FALSE
OWNE
FUNC
Legal Owner s: GPWL
Legal Member s: CASE
. f i l
. wi dow 4
12.0 4 B:12
Index of Commands
C Index of Commands
C.1 Introduction
Note: All commands with a section reference of ***** are standard PDMS commands which
are common to all constructor modules and which are not described in this manual.
For details of these commands, see the PDMS DESIGN Reference Manual. The
most common commands are listed first (CLOCK to QUIT), followed by the
remainder in alphabetical order.
C.2 List of Commands
COMMAND SECTION
CLOCK 3.1, 3.2
COPY 3.1, 3.3
DELETE 3.1, 3.4
END 3.1, 3.5
GOTO 3.1, 3.6
INCLUDE 3.1, 3.7
LOCK 3.1, 3.8
NAME 3.1, 3.9
NEW 3.1, 3.10
OLD 3.1, 3.11
QUERY 3.1, 3.12
RENAME 3.1, 3.13
REORDER 3.1, 3.14
SAME 3.1, 3.15
UNLOCK 3.1, 3.16
UNNAME 3.1, 3.17
MONITOR 3.19
QUIT 3.19
12.0 4 C:2
Index of Commands
APPLICATION 2.4.1, 2.6.1
APROPERTY 2.3.2
BACKWARDS *****
BFLEXIBILITY 2.5.1
BPROPERTY 2.3.2
BTOLERANCE 2.5.1
CARDS 2.7.1
CASES 2.4.1
CASREFERENCE 2.4.1
CASTYPES 2.4.1
CASWORLDS 2.4.1
CATYPE 2.4.1
CIWEIGHT 2.5.1
CMPDATA 2.5.1
CMPTYPES 2.5.1
CMPWORLDS 2.5.1
CONSTRAINTS 2.6.1
CONTYPES 2.6.1
CONWORLDS 2.6.1
CORALLOWANCE 2.5.1
CPROPERTY 2.3.2
CPULL 2.6.1
CPUTWIST 2.6.1
CTXT 2.7.1
CWEIGHT 2.5.1
DATE 2.7.1
DENSITY 2.3.2
DESCRIPTION 2.7.1
DFFLEXIBILITY 2.5.1
DFLFACTORS 2.6.1
DISPLACEMENT 2.6.1
DLIMIT 2.6.1
DMFLEXIBILITY 2.5.1
EFACTOR 2.5.1
EXPANSION 2.3.2
FCOEFFICIENCENT 2.6.1
FINCH *****
FLIMIT 2.6.1
FLUIDS 2.3.1, 2.3.2, 2.3.3
COMMAND SECTION
Index of Commands
FORWARDS *****
FORCE 2.6.1
FUNCTION 5.1
HEAD *****
INCH *****
IPRESSURE 2.4.1
MATWORLDS 2.3.1
MILLIMETRE *****
MLIMIT 2.6.1
MM *****
MOMENT 2.6.1
MRKR 2.5.1
OUTDIAMETER 2.5.1
OWNER *****
PNAME 2.3.2
POISSONS 2.3.2
PQUALIFIER 2.3.2
PRESSURE 2.3.2
PRFC 2.5.1
PTEMPERATURE 2.4.1
RFLFACTORS 2.6.1
RINERTIA 2.5.1
RLIMIT 2.6.1
RMFLEXIBILITY 2.5.1
ROTATION 2.6.1
RPRESSURE 2.4.1
RTEMPERATURE 2.4.1
RTYPE 2.6.1
RUNDECKS 2.7.1
RUNWORLDS 2.7.1
SAPROPERTY 2.3.2
SBPROPERTY 2.3.2
SCPROPERTY 2.3.2
SDENSITIES 2.3.2
SDENSITY 2.3.2
SDTHICKNESS 2.5.1
SEXPANSIONS 2.3.2
SHAPE 2.5.1
SHOCKLOAD 2.4.1
COMMAND SECTION
12.0 4 C:4
Index of Commands
SIF 2.5.1
SOLIDS 2.3.1, 2.3.2, 2.3.3
SREFERENCE 2.3.2
SSTRESSES 2.3.2
STEXT 2.3.2
STRESS 2.3.2
SYOUNGS 2.3.2
TAIL *****
TAPROPERTY 2.3.2
TBPROPERTY 2.3.2
TCASES 2.6.1
TCPROPERTY 2.3.2
TDENSITIES 2.3.2
TEMPERATURE 2.3.2
TEXTS 2.3.2
TEXPANSIONS 2.3.2
TGRADIENT 2.4.1
TPOISSONS 2.3.2
TSTRESSES 2.3.2
TUBDATAS 2.5.1
TYOUNGS 2.3.2
UIWEIGHT 2.5.1
UNAME 2.7.1
UNITS 4.1
UWEIGHT 2.5.1
WDIAMETER 2.5.1
WEFACTOR 2.4.1
WIFACTOR 2.4.1
WPRESSURE 2.4.1
WTOLERANCE 2.3.1
YOUNGS 2.3.2
COMMAND SECTION
Index
12.0 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd Index page 1
A
ABREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5
ADEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5
ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:4
ALPHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:3
ALPHA FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:3
ALPHA LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:3
APARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:7, 2-6:4
ATLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:4
B
BLIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:3
BLTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:3
BLTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:3
BOXI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:7
BTSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:3
C
CATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:3
Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:3
Catalogue Element Types . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:5
CATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:2, 2-B:2
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5, 2-3:2, 2-4:1
CENTRELINE See CL . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:13
CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:5, 2-4:13
COCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:2, 2-B:2
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5
comma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:5, 2-2:10
Cursor-picking Identifier . . . . . . .1-2:4, 1-2:8
D
DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8:1
DDANGLE . . . 2-4:1, 2-4:11, 2-6:12, 2-6:16
DDHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4:1, 2-4:11
DDRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4:1, 2-4:11
DECP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7:5
DES APARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:8
DES OPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:8
DES PARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2:4
DTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7:3
DTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:5
DTSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:5, 2-8:1
E
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3:2, 2-3:3
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2:4
F
filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2:3
FINISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3:3
FIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3:3
FITT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:6, 2-2:12
G
GETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3:2
GMSET . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5, 2-5:5, 2-6:17
GMSSET . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6, 2-5:18, 2-6:20
GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3:3
I
INCBOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:8
INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:1
INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:16
integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
IPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:7, 2-6:4
J
J OIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6, 2-2:12
L
LAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3:3
LCYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:8
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:17, 2-4:18
letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:5, 2-4:15
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:11
LPYR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:11
LSNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:13
LTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:3
M
MEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3:3
minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
MMBOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:8
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:1, 2-4:11
MSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:4
MTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5
MTYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:4
MULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
N
NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6:15
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6:2
NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3:3
NGMSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5, 2-5:16
NOMINB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:8
NRBWLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:8
NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6:13
NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:17
O
OBST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:6, 2-5:18
OBSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:5, 2-4:16
OPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:7
OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3:2
P
PAAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:22
PARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:7, 2-6:4
PAXI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:22
PBORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13
PCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-B:1, 2-B:2
PCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13
PDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13
PKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:18, 2-6:15, 2-6:17
PLAXI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:16
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:3, 2-6:15
PLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:4, 2-4:5, 2-4:18
plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2:3
PPOINT . . . . . . . 2-5:1, 2-6:8, 2-6:9, 2-6:10
PPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4:2, 2-4:17
PREVIOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3:3
PROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:6, 2-2:11
PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4:14
PSKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:14
PTAXI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:2, 2-6:8, 2-6:12
PTCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:2, 2-6:9
PTCDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13
PTMIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:3, 2-6:10
PTSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5, 2-5:1, 2-6:8
PTSSET . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5, 2-5:3, 2-6:15
PURP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7:8
PX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13, 2-6:17
PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13, 2-6:17
PZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:13
Q
QUERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6:3
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3:3
R
RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3:1
REPRESENTATION 2-4:2, 2-4:4, 2-4:5, 2-4:13,
2-4:14, 2-4:15, 2-4:16, 2-4:17, 2-4:18
S
SAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3:2
SANN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:19, 2-6:20
SAVEWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3:2
SBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7:3
SBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:6
SCOM See COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2:5
SCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:7
SCTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5:12
SCYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:8
SDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:10
SDSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:10
SDTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:1
SDTE See DTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5
SECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:1, 2-4:11
SEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:15
SFIT See FITT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6
SIGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
SJ OI See J OIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6
SKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6:14
SLOO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:15
SMTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:2
SMTE See MTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:5
solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
Specific Element Identifier . . . . . . . . . 1-2:7
SPRF See PROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6
SPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:20
SPVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:20
SREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:18, 2-6:20
SREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:15
SRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:13
SSLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:9
SSPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:14
star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
STCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
STSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:4
SVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5:15
Syntax diagram conventions . . . . . . . . 1-2:1
T
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2:6, 2-7:7
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5
TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4:5, 2-4:13, 2-5:14
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3:3
U
UDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:4
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
USEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7:5
V
value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
varid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2:3
VISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3:5
W
word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2:3

Catalogues and Specifications Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogues and Specifications Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogues and Specifications Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogues and Specifications

You might also like